Home

User's Manual

1. Input at 24 VDC Output at 24 VDC Numberof 32 and BA Numberof 32 and 26 4 points per 29 eat VDC points per 29 VDC common common which are si which are si multaneous multaneous on on 52 55 52 55 118 6124 118 6124 Ambienttemperature C F Ambient temperature C F Internal circuit diagram Input Output m Output display LED m 6 8 kQ Xn P 4 2 5 Output terminal 2 f z External power T 320 sa 5 g v eae eee supply 24 VDC T b su or 34 2 E load to inside COM g a ov svc Phase fault protection Terminal layout diagram Input connector Output connector Left side on unit Right side on unit X108 Y 100 oe X100 NRA Y108 Ho a 1 ge 2o a oe aa 24VDC 4 ae i ane af 1 4 T i e oe Lge ale 5to24V DC 1 H il eH ie Front view of connector ee eH to The COM terminals are connected Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector internally with the same connector it is recom mended that they also be connected externally Note The number in the connector are for the first expansion 3 8 Chapter 4 1 0 Allocation 4 1 WO Allocation cc a E eens 4 3 I O Allocation FP FP 4 1 1 0 Allocation 4 1 1 0 Allocation T
2. Analog potentiometer VO potentiometer 0 Changes the value of DT90040 within a range of KO to K1000 V1 potentiometer 1 Changes the value of DT90041 within a range of KO to K1000 Figure 223 FP Analog potentiometer Applicable special data register a Potentiometer No Special data register Range of change KO to K1000 11 1 2 Example Showing How the Analog Potentiometers are Used The FP is provided with special data registers in which the values in the registers change in response to the analog potentiometers being moved If the values of these registers are sent to the clock setting value area a clock can be created that allows the time to be set using the potentiometer Writing example of the clock setting value The value of the special data register DT90040 that corresponds to the analog potentiometer V0 is sent to the setting value area SV0 of TMXO to set the time for the Clock RIOLO ot x tedieh aiaia Te willl cme enon Ate oie Pe Bes es ee H FO MV DT 90040 SVO _ f Data transmission instruction ia The value of special data register DT90040 Y sentto the setting value area RO TMX 0 K 999 0 1 second type timer 7777 7 m t K999 is set as a dummy value _ ___ J Figure 224 P rogram example of analog potentiometer Other Functions FP 11 2 Clock Calendar Function This section explains about the cloc
3. 13 52 FP gt 13 8 Table of Instructions BCD arithmetic instructions 4 digit BCD B S D D S gt D 5 data addition 8 digit BCD DB S D D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D 7 data addition 4 digit BCD data addition Destination setting 8 digit BCD S1 1 1 S2 1 2 D 1 D data addition Destination setting 4 digit BCD data B S D D S D 5 subtraction 8 digit BCD data DB S D D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D 7 subtraction 4 digit BCD data subtraction Destination setting 8 digit BCD data S1 1 S1 S241 S2 gt D 1 D subtraction Destination setting 4 digit BCD data 1 2 D_ S1 x 2 D D multiplication B 8 digit BCD data DB 1 2 D S141 S1 x S241 2 D43 D42 D 1 D multiplication 4 digit BCD B S1 S2 D S1 S2 quotient D remainder DT90015 data division 8 digit BCD S141 S1 S241 S2 quotient D 1 D data division remainder DT90016 DT90015 4 digit BCD D 1 D data increment 8 digit BCD D 1 D 1 D 1 D data increment 4 digit BCD D 1 D data decrement 8 digit BCD D 1 D 1 D 1 D data decrement a A N F53 Tl ul N Data comparison instructions 16 bit data S1 gt S2 R900A on 5 comparison S1 S2 R900B on S1 lt S2 gt R900C on 32 bit data S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on c
4. ee ee Her yH Positioning op rations stat esets elapsed value of high speed E R101 R H F1 Dmv KO DT 90044 CHO F167 HCIR_K 0 K 5000 YO Sets high speed counter CHO When elapsed value reaches 5 000 YO goes off R101 Yos peek Se ee 1 5 gt E Setthe inverter operation signal Yo R 903A R100 TO R102 pte a Hor YH Posotioning done pulse 0 5 s i a TMX 0 K 5 OTstypetmer SOS Figure 80 FP High speed counter function sample program 1 program High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FP Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example Conveyor PEZ Input terminal Encoder input X0 ill Operation start X5 O O Output terminal Inverter operation YO gt Inverter Y1 gt high speed pi Po z pi o o D l Wee Q Encoder Inverter Operation S top Fast Slow COM Figure 81 FPE High speed counter function sample program 2 wiring Operation chart S peed 4500 5000 Number of pulse 1 0 allocation C e oes R101 Positioning operation start Arrival at deceleration point R900C Comparison instruction lt flag High speed counter CHO control flag Figure 82 FP High speed counter function sample program 2 operation chart FP 6 3 High speed Counter Function Program When X5
5. Computer Transmission program Reception processing program Command messages sent from S the PLC should contain the follow ing content The unit number of the PLC that ommand messa 0 a essage sent the response Start Destina Text Check End code tion O code code Command messages should Confirmation of whether or not the processing was carried out suc contain the following content cessfully when sent The type of command processed The unit number of the PLC If the command was used to read to which the command is data the data that was read being sent If an error occurred and the com The type of command mand could notbe processed suc Any settings and data re cessfully the content of the error quired in order to execute the command Vv v A response is returned and proc The command and data are essing is carried out based on the sent to the PLC with the content of the response such as specified unit number retrieving any data that was sent Response message Start Source Text Check End code COTA code code Figure 141 FP MEWTOCOL COM 8 4 FP 8 1 Computer Link 8 1 3 Format of Command and Response Command message Items necessary for commands should be noted in the text segment and the unit number specified before sending the command Start cod
6. H Fo mv K100 LDO LD0 100 LD0 100 LDO 100 ee No 1 Link register a LD 0 100 Link register If a constant of 100 is written to LDO of the master station No 1 the contents of LDO in the other station No 2 are also changed to a constant of 100 Figure 129 FP PLC link function Applicable communication cassette For 1 N communication 1 channel RS485 type Part No FPG COM3 Communication Cassette FP 7 2 Communication Cassette This section explains about the optional communication cassette for FP 7 2 1 Type of Communication Cassette The communication cassette contains the following three types which can be selected based on the application involved 1 channel RS232C type Part No FPG COM1 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible Terminal layout FPS Abbreviation Name Signal direction Transmitted data Unit External device Received data Unit External device RS Request to Send Unit External device cs Clear to Send Unit External device SG Signal Ground Figure 130 FPE 1 channel RS232C type communication cassette 2 channel RS 232C type Part No FPG COM2 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a three wire RS232C
7. Figure 133 FPX Communication cassette attachment procedure 1 2 Install the communication cassette Communication cassette ig Figure 134 FPE Communication cassette attachment procedure 2 3 Plug in the communication connector Re go o Se NJA Figure 135 FPE Communication cassette attachment procedure 3 ta Note Turn off the power supply to the control unit before installing the communication cassette FP 7 4 Wiring of Communication Cassette 7 4 Wiring of Communication Cassette This section explains about the wiring of optional communication cassette 7 4 1 Wiring the Connector with the Communication Cassette The communication connector provided with the communication cassette has a screw type terminal block Use the following for wiring Figure 136 FPE Communication connector Accessory communication connector The communication connector made by Phoenix Contact Co should be used Model No of Phoenix Contact Co Model No Product No MC1 5 5 ST 3 5 1840396 Suitable wire Twisted wire Size Cross sectional area AWG 28 to 16 0 08 mm to 1 25 mm Number of pin Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models are marketed by Phoenix Contact Co Cross sectional product number area 0 25 mm AWG 24 Al 0 25 6 YE Phoenix 0 50 mm AWG 20 Al 0
8. 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Baud rate setting 19200 bps Starting address for data received DT200 No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte e Settings when using the COM 2 port Communication mode General communication Communication format Character bit Parity anaana Odd Stop bithics os evan 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting 19200 bps No 418 Starting address for data received DT200 No 419 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte Communication format setting for FP series PLC FPO FP1 Communication mode for COM port Computer link Communication format for COM port Character bit Parity 20c0ce0es Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 414 Baud rate for COM port 19200 bps Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FP Connection example with FP series PLC FPO FP1 e When using the 1 channel RS232C type of communication cassette Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM port FPx side 5 pin side 3 pin RD Received data RD Fas Requesto Send RS fe Connection with FP1 COM port een FP gt side 5 pin RD ReceivedData_ RD Request to Send Rs m rors 4 Figure 188 FPE Connection example with FP series PLC 1 e When using the 2 channel RS232C type of comm
9. c eaaa 6 43 6 5 PWM Output Function 22 200 cteninwswiteges evade Kay ouee yew weeys 6 56 6 5 1 Overview of PWM Output Function 6 56 6 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function 6 56 Chapter 7 Communication Cassette 7 1 Communication Functions of FP acs dsereica ei aee ee saree ees 7 3 7 1 1 Functions of Communication Cassette 0 7 3 7 2 Communication Cassette lauua uaaa 7 6 7 2 1 Type of Communication Cassette uaaa 7 6 7 2 2 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports 7 7 7 2 3 Communication Specifications of Communication Cassette 7 8 7 3 Attachment of Communication Cassette 0 eee eee eee 7 10 7 3 1 Attachment Procedure 2 fawn dies etdets eieateioametdwiua 7 10 Table of Contents FPS 7 4 Wiring of Communication Cassette copys Vo eee Sees oe eas 7 11 7 4 1 Wiring the Connector with the Communication Cassette 7 11 7 4 2 Tool for Tightening Communication Connector Terminal Block 7 12 T43 Wiring Method ssir reres terreri ei neee s Ride oan 7 12 7 4 4 Cautions Regarding Wiring cc cece cece eee eee 7 12 Chapter8 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 8 1 Computer LINK siasa 8 3 8 1 1 Overview of Function 4 0 05 cc ney ev eee sin bey Btetet ey 8 3 8 1 2 Explanation of Operation when Using a Computer Link 8 4 8 1 3 FormatofCommand and Response 8 5 8 1 4 Types of Commands that Ca
10. DT90126 Forced Input Output unit No Used by the system DT90127 to DT90139 Not used DT90140 DT90141 DT90142 DT90143 DT90144 DT90145 DT90146 DT90147 DT90148 to DT90155 DT90156 DT90157 DT90158 DT90159 MEWNET WO PLC link status Not used MEWNET WO PLC link status Not used The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current interval between two receiving operations val ue in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the sending operation is performed e current interval between two sending operations ue in the register x 2 5ms e minimum interval between two sending operations ue in the register x 2 5ms e maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms Area used for measurement of receiving interval Area used for measurement of sending interval N A A N A N A N A j N A N A DT90160 MEWNET WO PLC link unit No Stores the unit No of PLC link N A DT90161 MEWNET WO PLC link error flag Stores the error contents of PLC link N A DT90162 to DT90169 Not used 13 37 Specifications FPS A Available N A Not available address Name Bescon heading Wing DT901
11. This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPE Communication cassette three wire RS232C port Itsupports 1 1 computer links and 2 channel RS 232C type general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS Setting of system register To carry out 1 1 communication using a computer link the system registers should be set as shown below Settings when using the COM 1 port Communication mode for COM 1 port Computer link Communication format for COM 1 port Character bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Baud rate setting for COM 1 port 9600 bps to 115200 bps Settings when using the COM 2 port Communication mode for COM 2 port Computer link Communication format for COM 2 port Character bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Baud rate setting for COM 2 port 9600 bps to 115200 bps The communication format and baud rate transmission speed should be set to match the connected computer FPS 8 2 Connection Example with External Device Connection example with computer When using the 1 channel RS232C type of communication cassette Computer side FPZ side 5 pin D SUB 9 pin PRD RecevedData_ RD
12. When the program is run the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table pds Control code 1 Bed Initial speed 2 Maximum speed 2 2000 Hz Acceleration deceleration time 3 150 ms ile Deviation counter clear signal 4 Not used Pulse output diagram when home position proximity input is not used Home sensor on XA on 2000 Hz 100 Hz 0 Hz 1 a 150 ms Pulse output diagram when home position proximity inputis used XA on Proximity Home sensor on sensor on 2000 Hz 100 Hz 0 Hz 150 ms 150 ms Figure 95 FP Pulse output diagram of F171 instruction 6 26 FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function 1 Control code lt H constant gt 0 Fixed Hj jj ji iii LI L Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps Can be specified for only Ver 2 0 or later Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Operation mode and output type 20 Type I home return CW 21 Type home return CCW 22 Type home return Direction output off 23 Type home return Direction output on 24 Type home return CW and deviation counter reset 25 Type home return CCW and deviation counter reset 26 Type home return Direction output off and deviation counter reset 27 Type I home return Di
13. 48 Hz to 100 kHz Addition counting CW F172 PLSH DT 300 K0 EE F Pulse output instruction J OG operation 7 The data table headed by DT300 is used and The data table headed by DT300 is used _ pulses are output from CHO Pulses are output from CHO Figure 121 FP Sample program J OG operation direction program Pulse output diagram P g XB JOG command on 300Hz o i OHz Figure 122 FPE Sample program JOG operation pulse output diagram side side Motor gt y J OG operation minus direction While XC is in the on state a pulse is output from CCW output Y 1 of specified channel CHO Program XC Data table F1 DMV K 300 DT 312 Frequency speed 300 Hz Control code H11 21 Duty 1 4 25 J 48 Hz to 100 kHz Subtraction counting CCW F 172 PLSH DT 310 K0 o F Pulse output instruction J OG operation 7 d The data table headed by DT310 is used an The data table headed by DT310 is used _ pulses are output from CHO Pulses are output from CHO Figure 123 FP Sample program J OG operation diagram program Pulse output diagram side side Motor XC J OG command off 300Hz OHz Figure 124 FPE Sample program J OG operation pulse output diagram 6 54 FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Function Emergency stop over limit If XD turns off while a pulse is being output from Y 0 the output of the p
14. Current position S 0 0 DT90044 DT90045 0 DT90200 DT90201 0 FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output control instruction F0 This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse outputs and setting and resetting the home position proximity input Specify this FO MV instruction together with the special data register DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again a Example 1 Enable the home position proximity input during home return operations and begin deceleration In the program the home position proximity input is enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations x3 H pF Fo mv H 10 DT90052 J O Fo MV H O DT90052 J je Figure 101 FPZ Program 1 of pulse output control instruction FO A Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output X7 H pF FO MV H 8 DT90052 FO MV H 0 DT90052 Figure 102 FP Program 2 of pulse output control instruction FO Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built in high speed counter Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the special data register DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and DT90045 Use only this F1 DMV i
15. External device Received Data Unit External device Not used 5V Unit External device Figure 10 FP Parts and Functions Tool port The following are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory The system registers should be used to change these Baudrate 9600 bps Character bit 8 bit Parity check Odd parity Stop bitlength 1 bit 2 1 3 Communication Cassette The detachable communication cassette optional can be selected from among the three types shown below Type Applicable communication Terminal layout diagram function 1 channel Computer link RS232C General purpose serial wpe communication Transmitted Data Output Received Data Input Request to Send Output Clear to Send Input SD RD RS CS G Signal Ground 2 channel Computer link RS232C General purpose serial PET type communication AERO meia Transmitted Data Output COM 1 za R1 Received Data Input COM 1 S2 Transmitted Data Output COM 2 R2 Received Data Input COM 2 Si Ri S2 R2 SG SG Signal Ground COM 1 and 2 1 channel Computer link RS485 type G eneral purpose serial LH General Terminal communication Arpasos station station n n PLC link e SISSIES OPEN 2 Shor FPS 2 2 Input and Output Specifications 2 2 Input and Output Specifications
16. elapsed value of high speed DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter elapsed value counter D area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Note Note z The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used 13 58 FP 13 8 Table of Instructions Target value much on with channel specification Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Target value much off with channel specification Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return Positioning pulses are output from the specified chan nel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S F173 F174 F175 F176 Basic F183 Pulse output with channel specification J OG operation PWM output with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification Selectable data table con trol operation Pulse output Linear inter polation Pulse output Circular interpolation function instru Auxiliary timer 32 bit Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output is output from the specified output in ac cordance with the contents of the
17. unit mm in 13 70 FPS Index Index Numbers 1 N communication 9 31 A Absolute lt absolute value control gt 6 23 Absolute value positioning operation 6 48 Addition and subtraction input mode 6 11 Addition input mode 6 10 Analog potentiometer 11 3 Attachment of communication cassette 7 10 Backup battery 5 24 Basic instructions 13 44 Battery error alarm 5 25 BCD data 13 67 Booting time 6 9 C Capacitive loads 5 15 Changing the communication mode of COM Port 9 37 Clock calendar Function 11 4 Command 8 5 Command message 8 5 Commands 8 8 Communication Cassette 7 3 Communication cassette 1 6 2 6 7 6 Communication specifications of commu nication cassette 7 8 Communication status LEDs 2 4 Computer link 7 3 8 3 Computer link 1 N communication 8 18 Connection example of PLC link 10 18 Connection example with external device 9 22 Connection example with external de vices 9 16 Constants 13 12 Control mode 6 23 Controllable I O points 1 7 1 8 CW CCW output method 6 21 D Data transmission 9 4 Data transmission to external device 9 8 Direction distinction mode 6 11 E Elapsed value change and read instruc tion F1 6 13 Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 6 41 Emergency stop circuit 5 22 Error cords 13 42 F F159 MTRN instruct
18. 9 16 Data Transmitted and Received with the FP 9 29 1 N Communication oe adirag se yeuta ays etek ya ts 9 31 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 9 33 Changing the Communication Mode of COM Port 9 37 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS FPS 9 1 General purpose Serial Communication 9 1 General purpose Serial Communication This section explains about overview of general purpose serial communication 9 1 1 Overview of Function What is the general purpose serial communication Using the COM ports itsends and receives data to and from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader Data is read and written using the FP ladder program and data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM port by means of the FP data registers Image processing device Sending data using the F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent by transferring the data to a data register and then sending it us ing the F159 MTRN instruction Data register DT o D Transmitted data T Received data a Receiving data to the data register s designated as the received buffer Data is received by data being sent from the RS232C port to the data register specified by the system register as the received buffer and then being stored there automati
19. CW and CCW mode Pulse and Sign mode When using 1 channel 100 kHz max x1 ch When using 2 channels 60 kHz max x2 ch X5 reset input ch2 Output point number Outputmode Maximum output frequency When using linear interpolation function Max 100 kHz When using circular interpolation function Max 20 kHz High speed counter used Note 2 Input Output contact used Note 1 Two phase ch0 or ch2 X2 or X5 Home input YO or Y3 CW output or Pulse output Yl or Y4 CCW output or Sigh output Y2 or Y5 Deviation counter reset output Output point Two points Y0 Y3 number Output frequency Output duty High speed counter used Note 2 Output contactused Note 1 1 5 to 12 5k Hz at resolution of 1000 15 6k to 41 7k Hz at resolution of 100 0 0 to 99 9 at resolution of 1000 1 to 99 at resolution of 100 Two phase ch0 or ch 2 tse Notes 1 The contacts noted above cannot be allocated for more than one function Also contacts that are not assigned to the various functions can be used as general inputs outputs Inputs X0 to X5 are pulse catch inputs and can also be used for interrupt input 2 If using pulse output or PWM output one channel of the two phase high speed counter is used for each output point in each case If only one pulse output point is being used either one point of the two phase high speed counter or three points of the single phase hig
20. DT201 to and sent to DTO Check of received data To determine whether the received data is anormal response the comparison in struction is used to check whether the _ character string 1 is stored in DT1 Check of received data The eight character ASCII code beginning with DT3 is converted to a hexadecimal l value and stored in DT50 and DT51 To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the reception done con tact R 9038 based on the empty data FP 9 3 Connection Example with External Devices The various buffer statuses The following shows the statuses of the send and received buffers when the sample program is run DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 DT110 Transmission buffer Number of bytes to be transmitted Statuses before transmission Figure 192 FP Various buffer statuses DT200 DT201 DT202 DT203 DT204 DT205 DT206 DT207 DT208 Reception buffer Statuses when reception is completed Received number of bytes Received data is stored in order from the lower order byte Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS a A L Si Tip Contents of the response If K100 is stored in DTO and K200 is stored in DT1 of the FP series PLC on the o
21. X40 to X47 FPO E16R E16T E16P Input 8 points X20 to X27 Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y 40 to Y 4F X60 to X67 Y60 to Y67 Y 60 to Y 6F FPO E32T E32P FPO E16YT E16YP Output 16 points Y20 to Y 2F Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output 16 points Y 20 to Y 2F Y 40 to Y 4F Y 60 to Y6F O No of FPO analog I O unit for right side expansion The 1 0 allocation of FPO analog I O unit FPO0 A21 is determined by the installation location First expansion CHO 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F Second Third expansion expansion WX4 WX6 X40 to X4F X60 to X6F CH1 16 points WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 WX7 X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Output 16 points WY2 Y 20 to Y 2F WY4 WY6 Y 40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F 13 10 FP 13 2 1 0 No Allocation 1 0 No of FPO A D converter unit for right side expansion The I O allocation of F P 0 A D converter unit F P0 A80 is determined by the installation location The data of the various channels is switched and read using a program that includes the flag for switching converted data CHO CH2 CH4 and CH6 each 16 points First expansion WX2 X20 to X2F Second expansion WxX4 X40 to X4F Third expansion WX6 X60 to X6F CH1 CH3 CH5 and CH7 each 16 points 1 0 No of FPO I O link unit for right side expansion WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F WX7 X70 t
22. expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit no expansion cable is needed Remove the cover on the left side of the unit so that the internal left side connector for FP expansion is exposed Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units Expansion FP 3 4 Specifications of FP gt Expansion Unit 3 4 1 FP gt Expansion 1 0 Unit Parts and Functions FPG XY 64D2T Input 32 points Transistor output 32 points Front view rj 00000000_00000000 __O0D0DO00_D0UDUOD L i Right side view DIN standard rail attachment LED display selection switch Switches between the input 32 points and output 32 points of the LED display 2 Input connector 40 pins 3 Output connector 40 pins Inputand Output indicator LEDs FP expansion connector This expansion connector is used to connect the dedicated unit for FP Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion unit The hook is also used for installation on FPO mounting plate flat type Part No AFP 0804 _ DIN rail attachment lever The expansion unit enables attachment at a touch t
23. ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90228 DT90229 DT90230 DT90231 PLC link unit station No 3 or 11 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90232 DT90233 DT90234 DT90235 PLC link unit station No 4 or 12 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90236 DT90237 DT90238 DT90239 PLC link unit station No 5 or 13 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 A Available N A Not available Address Name Description Reading Writing A N A Unit No Station No selec tion for DT90220 to DT90251 0 Unit No Station No 1 to 8 ol 1 i 1 Unit No Station No 9 to 16 The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example When DT90219 is 0 Higher byte Lower byte DT90220 to DT90223 Unit Station No 1 hes contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 Setting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 13 40 FP 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers A Available N A Not available DT90247 PLC
24. turns off If system register 413 or 414 is set to header start code with STX the header start code is automatically added to the beginning of the data The terminator end code specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of the data DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 Transmission data A B C D JE FI G H Cr R9039 on R9049 off Execution condition on RO off F159 MTRN execution During transmission During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed Figure 173 Explanation during transmission 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted the S value is cleared to 0 and the transmission done flag R9039 R 9049 turns on When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions use one of the following methods Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number If you also do not wish to add an end code to receptions setsystem register 413 or 414 to Terminator None Af Example Program for transmitting 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator end code RO HDF z 1 1X gt F159 MTRN DT100 K 8 K1 Specify K 8 Figure 174 FP Data transmission sample program FP gt 9 2 Overview of Communication with External Devices Tip Do not include the terminator end code in the transmission data The terminator end cod
25. 0000 0000 0001 1011 0000 0000 0001 1100 0000 0000 0001 1101 0000 0000 0001 1110 0000 0000 0001 1111 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0010 0001 0000 0000 0010 0010 0000 0000 0010 0011 0000 0000 0010 0100 0000 0000 0010 0101 0000 0000 0010 0110 0000 0000 0010 0111 0000 0000 0010 1000 0000 0000 0010 1001 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001 D D D 0000 0000 0011 1111 D D D 0000 0000 1111 1111 D D D 0010 0111 0000 1111 D D D 0000 0000 0110 0011 D D D 0000 0010 0101 0101 D D D 1001 1001 1001 1001 13 67 Specifications FPS 13 11 ASCII Codes gt b7 gt be 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 bs 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Most significant digit ASCII HEX code 2 3 4 5 olo lola nul eL Alo J lP p 0 0 0 1 SOH IDC 1 A Q a q o lalalo GTC Dc 2 IB NOR MP ab lr o lolala BTR DCS ge eae dlclsledls o lalol EOT DC ode Be Ie ae ee ff ity oe est ENQ INAK 5 E E u e u a ie aol ae ie ack syni amp 6 F v if fv a C oE E g BEL ETB 716 wflgtw 5 cece BS canl 8 H X h x fe g ilolo st HT em 9 tly y ie stesso p LF suss y zi qj fz ide este esse p vt Escl PIR ll Te Paks ha ig tay Stop FFs lt lre WIM ide ey ihe thay ise feat ela cha eee
26. 250 ms Figure 114 FP Sample program pulse output diagram High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Home return operation minus direction When XA turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y 1 of specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X3 turns on deceleration begins and when X2 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value area DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0 0V 24V DC Home return start O Pulse output CW Pulse output CC ah i Motor driver Home input Home proximity input side side Motor BB i fl _ X20 CJ Home sensor Proximity sensor Figure 115 FPX Sample program home return operation direction FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Function Program XA R903A R42 RAO 9 yp cess aS Se ee DF Positioning operation running _ RAO AS i uN Sr ee et eg R40 R41 HF Positioning operation start _ R41 DT202 F DMV K 2000 DT 204 7 DT205 Maximum speed 2 000 Hz praos Acceleration time 150 msec F1DMmV K150 DT206 DT207 DT209 Deviation counter clear output Not used FipbMv Ko DT 208 Control code H11 21 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CCW F171 SPDH_DT 200 Ko Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT200 is used and The data
27. DT90101 cess 656 to 671 caes 672 to 687 cae 688 to 703 caee 904 to 719 promos Sa P ee Step ladder pro PU cess 752 to 767 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process Step ladder pro DT90108 When the proccess starts up the bit corresponding to the cess 768 to 783 process number turns on 1 Step ladder pro Monitor using binary display DT90109 cess 784 to 799 aa USIN habe Gea pray Example Step ladder pro s Step ladder pro DT90100 DT90099 DT90100 i i DT90111 cess 816 to 831 ek ee ee 655 651 647 643 640 Process No DT90112 Step ladder pro i i cess 832 to 847 1 Executing 0 Not executing Step ladder pro DT90113 cess 848 to 863 Step ladder pro DT90114 cess 864 to 879 Step ladder pro DT90115 cess 880 to 895 DT90116 Step ladder pro cess 896 to 911 DT90117 Step ladder pro cess 912 to 927 DT90118 Step ladder pro cess 928 to 943 DT90119 Step ladder pro cess 944 to 959 DT90120 Step ladder pro cess 960 to 975 DT90121 Step ladder pro cess 976 to 991 DT90122 Step ladder pro cess 992 to 999 Higher byte not used A programming tool software can be used to write data 13 36 FP 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers DT90123 to DT90125 Not used A Available N A Not available N A
28. FP High speed counter function Pulse output function Stepping motor Servo motor FP gt Pulse output CW THU Combined with a commercially available Motor N motor driver the function enables position driver 1 ae ing control With the exclusive instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and J OG operation se output CW 2 ulse output CC W Motor driver 2 Figure 59 FP Pulse output function Stepping motor Servo motor PWM output function When you increase the pulse width END By using the exclusive instruction the Heatran PWM output function enables a pulse J output of the desired duty ratio When you decrease it JLILIL Figure 60 FPE PWM output function Heating decreases High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 1 2___ Performance of Built in High speed Counter Number of channel There are four channels for the built in high speed counter The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used Counting range K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary The built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there f q
29. Max value 2 147 483 647 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 645 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 647 Min value 2 147 483 648 Ceen Figure 61 Counting range of high speed counter ia Note When the linear interpolation instruction F175 or the circular interpolation instruction F176 is used the value for the target value or the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 24 bit binary with sign The F175 and F176 instructions can be used only with the C32T2 control unit FP 6 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 6 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items This section contains specifications and restriction of functions 6 2 1 Table of Specifications High speed counter function specifications Input output contact Built in Memory area being used Performance number being used high specifications On off Count Input phe Control Elapsed Target Mini Maximum output input contact anas flag value value mum counting mode number AO area area input speed value pulse in pa width renthe Note 2 sis is reset input Note 1 Specify Addition CHO R903A DT90044 DT90046 10us_ Using the input to to one channel desired Sub DT90045 DT90047 Max 50 kHz output traction x1 channel Mees wE xT CH1 R903B DT90048 DT90050 Using cin X2 to to two channels
30. Pro 2 _ Request to Send Figure 149 FPE Computer link connection example 1 computer When using the 2 channel RS232C type of communication cassette Computer side FP side 5 pin D SUB 9 pin s Transmitted Data 1 Ri freceweanami Ro ez fRecevedbaaz Ro j 56 signal Ground s6 _ jH To other device Figure 150 FP Computer link connection example 2 computer Programming for a computer link To use a computer link a program should be created that enables command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side The PLC automatically sends back a response to commands No communication program is required on the PLC side Also if a software program such as PCWAY is used on the computer side PLC data can be easily compiled without having to think about the MEWTOCOL COM Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS 8 2 2 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with programmable display GT10 GT30 Outline A 1 1 computer link with a programmable display GT10 GT30 connects the FP and a programmable display using an RS232C cable Communication is carried out by the PLC sending responses to commands from the programmable display side No program is required for communication Operation can be carried out using the programmable display simply by setting the mutual communications settings Programmable display GT
31. RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller AB Aborts communication Read data area Write data area Read timer counter set value area Write timer counter set value area Monitoring start Preset contact area fill command Preset data area fill command Read system register Write system register Read the status of PLC Remote control Abort paraa C E ess es re Fesser or tosata montarea f0 ee FP 8 1 Computer Link ie Tip l 3 Commands and responses used with the FP have a dedicated header start code added to the MEWTOCOL COM communica tion protocol of the FP series PLC The contents of the specified header vary depending on the commu nication conditions With the FP in addition to ordinary MEWTOCOL COM an expan sion header is also supported that enables single frames of up to 2 048 characters to be sent Type of header No of characters that can be sentin 1 frame Max 2048 characters The number of characters that can be sentis restricted by the type of header and the command Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS 8 1 5 Setting the Communication Parameters when Using a Computer Link Setting of communication speed baud rate and communication format The settings for the COM port communication speed and communication
32. done using tools When performing remote switching from the programming tool the position of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED Otherwise restart the FP and change the mode of operation with the RUN PROG mode switch Communication status LEDs These display the communication status of the COM 1 and COM 2 ports LED LED and communication status COM 1 S Transmitted data Flashes while data is being transmitted monitor Goes out when no data is being transmitted F Received data ashes while data is being received monitor onito Goes out when no data is being received a Tool port RS232C This portis used to connect a programming tool Input connector 10 pins x 2 Inputindicator LEDs 2 4 FP gt 2 1 Parts and Functions Output connector 10 pins x 2 Output indicator LEDs Analog potentiometer analog dial Turning this dial changes the values of special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within the range of KO to K1000 It can be used for analog timers and other applications Power supply connector 24 V DC Supply 24 V DC It is connected using the power supply cable AF P0581 that comes with the unit Left side connector for FPE expansion This is used to connect dedicated FP expansion units on the left side of the control unit with the internal circuits The FPG C32T2 and FPG C24R
33. stations 32 units stations max when a C NET adapter is connected Notes 3 4 and 5 Interface Conforming to RS485 connected via the terminal block i Notes 1 In order to use the serial communication function 1 N communication RS485 type communication cassette is required 13 8 FPS 13 1 Table of Specifications 2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers 3 Unit Station numbers are specified using the system registers Up to 31 units stations can be set using the switches on the control unit 4 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS 485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units stations transmission distance and transmission speed baud rate vary depending on the connected device 5 The values for the transmission distance transmission speed baud rate and number of units stations should be within the values noted in the graph below For transmission speed 115 2k bits s 99 For transmission speed 57 6k bits s 70 Number of units stations 40 0 700 1000 1200 Transmission distance m When using a transmission speed of 2 400 bits s to 38 4k bits s you can setup toa maximum of 99 units stations and a maximum transmission distance of 1 200 m PLC link function specification Note 1 Transmission distance 1 200 m
34. 3 937 ft Total distance Baud rate intrace tse Notes 1 RS485 type communication cassette is required in order to use the PLC link function 2 Unit Station numbers are specified using the switches on the control unit or the system registers 13 9 Specifications 13 2 I O No Allocation FP gt Control unit The allocation of the FP control unit is fixed Control unit I O No FPG C32T2 Output 16 points YO to YF FPG C24R2 Input 16 points X0 to XF Output 8 points YO to Y7 1 0 No of expansion unit I O numbers do not need to be set as 1 0 allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an expansion I O unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location FP expansion unit First for left side expansion expansion Second expansion Third Fourth expansion expansion FPG XY64D2T Input 32 points X100 to X11F X180to X19F X260to X27F X340 to X35F Output 32 points Y100toY11F Y180toY19F Y260toY27F Y340 to Y35F FPO expansion unit First for right side expansion expansion Second expansion X40 to X47 Third expansion FPO E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 Y 40 to Y 43 X60 to X67 X60 to X63 FPO E8YT E8YR E8YP FPO E8R Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y63 Y60 to Y67 FPO E16X Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
35. 5 The values for the transmission distance transmission speed baud rate and number of units stations should be within the values noted in the graph below For transmission speed 115 2k bits s 99 T a 1 For transmission I speed 57 6k bits s 70kF b N 1 Number of units stations 49 z 5 0 700 1000 1200 Transmission distance m When using a transmission speed of 2 400 bits s to 38 4k bits s you can setup toa maximum of 99 units stations and a maximum transmission distance of 1 200 m PLC link function specifications Note 1 Specification Transmission method Floating master Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance Total length 1 200 m 3 937 ft Transmission speed Baud rate 115 2 kbps Number of units stations Max 16 units stations Note 2 PLC link capacity Link relay 1 024 points Link register 128 words Interface Conforming to RS 485 Connection using terminal block t Notes 1 The RS485 type of communication cassette is necessary in order to use the PLC link function 2 Unit Station numbers are specified using the switches on the control unit or the system registers Communication Cassette FP 7 3 Attachment of Communication Cassette This section explains about the attachment procedure of optional communication cassette 7 3 1 Attachment Procedure 1 Insert a screwdriver under the cover to remove it
36. 50 6 WH Contact Co 0 75 mm AWG 18 Al 0 75 6 GY 1 00 mm AWG 18 Al 1 6 RD Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Model No of Phoenix Contact Co Model No Product No Phoenix Contact Co CRIMPFOX UD6 12 04 436 Communication Cassette FP 7 4 2 Tool for Tightening Communication Connector Terminal Block When tightening the terminals of the communication connector use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact Co Product No 1205037 blade size of 0 4 2 5 model No SZS 0 4 x 2 5 or screwdriver Part No AF P 0806 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m or less 7 4 3 Wiring Method Procedure 1 Remove a portion 7 mm 0 276 in of the wire s insulation k 7 mm Figure 137 FPX Communication connector wiring method 1 2 Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Figure 138 FPE Communication connector wiring method 2 7 4 4 Cautions Regarding Wirin The following items should be observed taking care not to cut or disconnect the wiring When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construction if the wire closes up
37. 8006F p is sent as a response to the command If there is an error 01 00 Cp is returned OO is the error code In addition to data area read and write commands the MEWTOCOL COM is also provided with contact area reading and writing and many other commands Communication cassette used with 1 1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1 1 general purpose serial Communication Name Description Part No This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FP Communication cassette five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible FPG COM1 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPx Communication cassette three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links 2 channel RS232C type and general purpose serial communication Communica tion with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 FPS 9 3 Connection Example with External Devices Setting of system register In the default settings the COM port is set to the computer link mode To carry out 1 1 communication using general purpose serial communication the system registers should be set as shown below Communication format setting for FP e Settings when using the COM 1 port Communication mode General communication Communication format Character bit Parity anaana Odd Stop bit
38. A 3 1 9 5 0 0 0 0 Output points per common 16 points common Off state leakage current 100 uA or less On state voltage drop 0 5 V or less Response time For Y0 Y1 Y3 Y4 at 15 mA or more 2 us or less For Y2 Y5 to YF 0 2 ms or less For Y0 Y1 Y3 Y4 at 15 mA or more 8 us or less For Y2 Y5 to YF 0 5 ms or less External power 21 6 to 26 4 V DC supply for driving internal Current 70 mA or less circuit Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Phase fault protection Thermal protection for Y2 Y5 to YF Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature C 32T Number of 16 alee ee points per at 26 4 V DC common 12 which are si multaneous 8 on 46 52 55 107 8 118 6124 Ambient temperature C F Figure 14 FP Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Specifications and Functions of Control Unit FP Internal circuit diagram YO Y1 Y3 Y4 _L External power supply T 24V DC Output indicator LED AA Output z 5 z g F Y Load Load U ad a U _ power supply g FH H T5 to 24 V DC g a 3 OV Figure 15 FP Internal circuit diagram output 1 Y2 Y5 to YF r Output ind
39. AND gt Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 41 S2 AND lt Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 AND lt Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 41 S2 32 bit data ORD Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two comparison 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 OR 1 S2 1 2 ORD lt gt Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S2 1 2 ORD gt Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 ORD gt Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 2 S241 2 ORD lt Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 2 ORD lt Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S2 41 S2 13 50 FP 13 8 Table of Instructions Table of High level Instructions Data transfer instructions V 16 bit data M
40. DT508 F1 DMV K300 DT506 Fl DMV K2000 DT510 F175 SPSH DT500 KO Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis CH2 so that the composite speed is an initial speed of 500 Hz the maximum speed is 5 000 Hz and the acceleration deceleration time is 300 ms The two axes are controlled so that a linear path is followed to the target position When the program is run the data table and positioning path are as shown below DT520 DT521 DT522 X axis CHO frequency range Y axis CH2 frequency range X axis CH0 number of acceleration deceleration steps Y axis CH2 number of acceleration deceleration steps DT523 Positioning data table BT Control code H1000 DT502 Composite speed DT503 Initial speed 500 Hz DT504 Composite speed DT505 Maximum speed 5000 Hz Brees Acceleration Deceleration time 300ms atic Target value X axis CH0 5000 pulses Brea Target value Y axis CH2 2000 pulses DT512 X axis CHO component speed DT513 Initial speed DT514 X axis CHO component speed DT515 Maximum speed DT516 Y axis CH2 component speed DT517 Initial speed DT518 Y axis CH2 component speed DT519 Maximum speed 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 7 7 Setting area Designated with user program Operation result storage area Parameters for each axis component calculated due to instruction execution are stor
41. Data Registers 13 28 13 7 Table of Error CordS aasia 13 42 13 8 Table of Instructions oasa 13 44 13 9 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 13 66 13 10 Hexadecimal Binary BCD nosau 13 67 13 11 AS 6 ll G0deS ey ceed s we eee Be eee Pa eS 13 68 13 12 DIMENSIONS kids ets nidu reida TEE EE tees 13 69 Specifications FPS 13 2 FPS 13 1 Table of Specifications 13 1 Table of Specifications This section contains the general and performance specifications for the FP 13 1 1 General Specifications C Rated operating voltage 24 V DC tary power offtime C5413 ms at21 6V 5msat24V 8 ms at264V Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F Storage temperature 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F 30 to 85 RH non condensing Storage humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Breakdown Between input output terminals and power supply terminal 500 VAC for 1 minute voltage function earth Between input terminal and output terminal Between input terminals X0 to X7 input terminals X8 to 500 VAC for 1 minute XF and power supply terminal function earth Between output terminals and power supply terminal func 1500 VAC for 1 minute tion earth Between input terminals X0 to X7 and input terminals X8 500 VAC for 1 minute to XF Between input terminals X0 to X7 input terminals X8 to 1500 VAC for 1 minute XF and output terminals Insulation Between input output ter
42. F FPX T COM COM Figure 46 FP Precautions when using capacitive loads About the short circuit protective circuit To prevent the output circuit from being damaged by a short circuit or other electrical problems on the output side a transistor with short circuit protection is provided Installation and Wiring FPS 5 3 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 3 937 in FPS 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type Supplied connector and Suitable wires The connector housings semi cover and welders listed below come supplied with the FP control unit Use the suitable wires given below Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Figure 47 FP Supplied MIL connector Supplied connector AFP0807 Type and Product No Welder contact AXW7221 Suitable wires Size Conductor cross sectional area _ Insulation thickness wea Ram E Pressure connection tool Product No AXY5200
43. Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Dalian Branch Office Shenzhen Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Shenzhen Branch Office Chengdu Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Chengdu Branch Office E Hong Kong Matsushita Electric Works Hong Kong Ltd Rm1601 16 F Tower 2 The Gateway 25 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2529 3956 E j apan Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Company 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 J apan Tel 81 06 6908 1050 Please contact Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Company H Head Office 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 J apan HTelephone J apan 81 Osaka 06 6908 1050 H Facsimile J apan 81 Osaka 06 6908 5781 http www nais e com COPYRIGHT 2002 All Rights Reserved ARCT1F333E 1 200202 1YT Specifications are subject to change without notice Printed in J apan ACG M333E 1
44. Near home sensor X3 Positioning start X8 O e e Positioning start X9 O Home return start XA O JOG start XB O J JOG star XC O gt Overrun XD BBS b contact jam am am a contact CI a contact bcontact Stepping motor Moving table side side AVAL Output terminal Pulse outputCW YO Pulse output CCW Power supp Figure 105 FP Pulse output function sample program wiring t Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 KQ 1 4 W resister Table of I O alocauon 10 We vow Home sensor input Overrnning signal Near home sensor input Pulse output CW Positioning start signal Pulse output CCW Positioning start signal Positioning in progress Home return start signal Positioning operation start JOG start signal Positioning done pulse JOG start signal High speed counter control flag for CHO High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Relative value positioning operation plus direction When X8 turns on the pulse is output from CW output Y 0 of specified channel CHO 0V 24V DC Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor driver side 10000 pulses WAAAY Figure 106 FPE Sample pro
45. Parameter Settings ne Tip Link areas consist of link relays and link registers for PLC link and used with respective control units The link relay which can be used in an area for PLC link is maximum 1 024 points and the link register is maximum 128 words S Example of link area allocation The areas for PLC link is divided into transmitted areas and received areas The link relays and link registers are transmitted from the transmitted area to the received area of a different FP Link relays and link registers with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the received area on the receiving side Link relay allocation FPS FPS FPS FP Unit No 1 Unit No 2 Unit No 3 Unit No 4 Transmitted Received area Figure 209 Example of link area allocation System register Range of link relay used for PLC link Starting no for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size 10 11 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP Link register allocation FPS FPS Unit No 1 Unit No 2 Transmitted area Figure 210 Example of link register allocation System register No 41 LDO No 1 aoa ascents tip 39 40 No 2 Transmitted a gt eee Received area No3 2 No3 0 Received area Transmitted area 127 127 FP FP Unit No 3 Unit No 4 Received area No 44 Range of link register used fo
46. Sign signal is on Figure 86 FP Pulse output function Pulse sign output method 2 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 4 3 1 0 Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method Two output contact are used as a pulse output for CW CCW The I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home inputis determined by the channel used See the table of specifications on page 6 6 Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW When using CHO When using CH2 FP gt FPE i Home input Home input x2 ome inpu x5 ER VAPEREA ai Near home X3 Near home X6 input Driver input Dier Yo CW output Y3 CW output Yl 4 I CCW output CCW output X3 or other desired input can X6 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input be specified for the near home input Figure 87 FP Pulse output function I O allocation when using CHO double pulse input Figure 88 FP Pulse output function I O allocation when using CH2 double pulse input Single pulse input driver pulse input and directional switching input method One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output The 1 0 allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used See the table of specifications on page 6 6 Near home i
47. The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here If 1 1 communication is being used 01 will be stored here G Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command The value should be read based on the content If the processing is not completed successfully an error code will be stored here so that the content of the error can be checked 0 1 RC 1 2 1 t If the read command was used the data that was read is stored here If normal Command name If error occurs Error code Response code If normal ASCII code H23 If error occurs ASCII code H21 Figure 145 FPE Response message text FP 8 1 Computer Link Check code This is the BCC block check code used to detect errors using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the start code and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text End code Terminator There is always a CR ASCII code HOD at the end of the message i Notes Precautions when reading data e Ifno response is returned the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications such as the communication speed data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC e Ifthe received response contains a instead of a the command was not processed su
48. a home return with the FP a Type home re turn and a Type II home return Type I home return The home return input is effective regardless of whether or not there is near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been com pleted In this mode home position proximity input is not used When home position proximity input When home position proximity input is not used is used Speed Home S d Home position Home p input on pee proximity input on input on Max speed i 7 Max speed F gt Initial speed Initial speed OHz OHZ Home inputis effective at any timing When home input is input while the home position proximity input is decelerating Home position Speed proximity input on Home Max speed input on Initial speed OHZ Type Il home return In this mode the home return inputis effective only after deceleration based on the home position proximity input has been completed Home position Home Speed proximity input on input on Max speed Initial speed OHz Home return input effective only during deceleration Figure 97 FPE Home return operation modes FPE 6 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output instruction F172 J OG operation target value setting This instruction is for OG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger
49. are allocated as the clock calendar setting area are sent 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT90058 t Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction DF or by changing H8000 to H0000 Example showing the date and time being written Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on Figure 226 FPE Sample program of clock calendar function 11 2 3__ Precautions Concerning Backup of Clock Calendar Data The clock calendar values are backed up using a battery Please be aware that these values cannot be used unless a battery has been installed in the FP No values have been set in the default settings so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify the values 11 5 Other Functions FPS 11 2 4 _Example Showing the Clock Calendar being Used Sample program for Fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here the clock calendar function is used to output the Y 0 signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the Hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time R9010 H F60 CMP DT 90053 H 830 e fpa comparison instruction The value of the special data register DT90053 Hour minute data is compared with the value of H830 8 30 R900B RO SS a E A E E S E E k _ _ _ _ _ _ comparison match is output RO TO BLO RESE E E ar AA ER HDF Appointed time output puls
50. area specified by D 1 D to the left Right shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit Shifts the one digit of data of D to the right Left shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit Right shift of multiple bits n bits Left shift of multiple bits n bits Right shift of one word 16 bit ifts the one digit of data of D to the left Shifts the n bits of data range by D1 and D2 to the right Shifts the n bits of data range by D1 and D2 to the left Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 to the right Left shift of one word 16 bit Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to the right Left shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit Data buffer instructions FIFO buffer define Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to the left The n words beginning from D are defined in the buffer Data read from FIFO buffer The oldest data beginning from S that was written to the buffer is read and stored in D Data write into FIFO buffer The data of S is written to the buffer starting from D 13 56 FP 13 8 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Basic fun
51. been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 F167 F171 F175 or F176 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction aa A N A DT90048 DT90049 DT90050 DT90051 High speed counter elapsed value area High speed counter target value area The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 32 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 or F167 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction A N A DT90052 High speed counter and pulse output control flag A value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting 15 a Channel setting 0 to 3 CHO to CH3 Home near input Invalid 1 Valid High speed counter instruction Continue 1 Clear Pulse output Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset Enable 1 Disable Count Enable 1 Disable S oftware reset No 1 Yes 13 31 Specifications FP DT90053 DT90054 DT90055 DT90
52. co pies it to DT100 and DT101 Figure 73 FP Program 2 of elapsed value change and read instruction F1 A Tip The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193 High speed counter control flag area of FP 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 DT90052 kae Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 Near home input 0 off lion Clear high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes FPS 6 3 High speed Counter Function Target value match on instruction F166 Af Example 1 XA If the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 for HPF F166 NETS KO K10000 va channel 0 matches K10000 output Y 7 turns on Figure 74 FP X Program 1 of target value match on instruction F166 af amp Example 2 XB If the elapsed value DT90200 and DT90201 for DF F166 HEIs Re 20000072 channel 2 matches K20000 output Y 6 turns on Figure 75 FP Program 2 of target value match on instruction F166 Target value match off instruction F167 af Example 1 XC If the elapsed value DT90048 and DT90049 for DF F167 HCIR K1 K30000 Y4 channel 1 matches K30000 output Y 4
53. controlled by the F159 MTRN instruction Data receiving No end code is included in the stored data The maximum volume of data thatcan be received Device with is 4 096 bytes RS232C port Reception done FP flag on Figure 164 FP Data reception FPS 9 1 General purpose Serial Communication 9 1 2 Program of General purpose Serial Communication The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data using the COM port The F159 MTRN instruction is used only with the FP and is an updated version of the earlier F144 TRNS instruction that allows multiple communication ports to be accommodated Please be aware that the earlier F144 TRNS instruction cannot be used with the F P F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent to and received from an external device through the specified COM port RO S n Doe teat aa H F159 MTRN DT 100 K8 k Serial data communication are sent from the COM 1 K1 port Devices that can be specified forS Only data registers DT can be specified as the transmission buffer Devices that can be specified byn WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD 10 to ID K H Devices that can be specified byD Only the K constants only K1 and K2 Figure 165 FP F159 MTRN instruction program Transmission of data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting wi
54. data table that starts with S Outputs the pulses from the specified channel accord ing to the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Turn on the specified output and R900D after set value S x 0 01 sec S1 D S2 D 1 S3 D 2 32 bit data AND S1 1 S1 D 1 D S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 S3 1 S3 gt D 5 D4 S1 1 S1 a S2 1 S2 D 1 D 32 bit data OR S1 1 S1 y S2 1 S2 D 1 D 32 bit data XOR S 1 1 S1 52 1 S2 v SIFT STJA S2 1 S2 D 1 D 32 bit data XNR S1 1 1 A S241 S2 v SIFIL STJ S27 52 gt D 1 D 13 59 Specifications FP Double word 32 bit data unites Data conversion instructions F235 16 bit binary data Gray code conversion S141 S1 A S341 S3 v S241 2 S341 53 D 1 D Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray codes and the converted result is stored in the D 32 bit binary data Gray code conversion Converts the 32 bit binary data of S 1 S to gray code and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D 16 bit gray code gt binary data conver
55. exclusive instruction F171 SPDH also enables automatic home return operation A dedicated instruction F172 PLSH is available for jogging operation which causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition is on A target value can also be set so that pulse output stops at the point when the target value is matched A dedicated instruction F174 PLOH is available that outputs pulses in conformance with the data table so that positioning control can be carried out in accordance with the data table A dedicated instruction F175 SPSH is available for linear interpolation control This enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control by specifying the composite speed the acceleration deceleration time and the target value A dedicated instruction F176 SPCH is available for circular interpolation control The user can select one of two circular forming methods one by specifying the pass positions and the other by specifying a center position Pulses are output using circular interpolation control by specifying the various parameters i Note The linear interpolation control instruction F175 SPSH and circular interpolation control instruction F176 SPCH can be used with the C32T2 control unit only Setting the system register When using the pulse output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to Do not use high speed counter FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Functio
56. format are specified using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Options on the menu bar and click on the COM 1 and 2 Port tab There are separate settings for COM 1 and COM 2 PLC Configuration setting dialog box Wdb Hbk Ration on Evor Tams Link ao High Speed Comia mipi hpt Tool Port CORN Fert come ret Ce ren un twos Peta Comm Hae C ut Modem eration f Boul Deere bot Hadit Dehin r _ Oae ee e a j Lo bic rete fie cee e Ho f ating rikpi ha d A maam Ho HE pad din ie L ESR Figure 147 FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No 412 Communication Comm Mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on the button and select Computer Link from the displayed pull down menu No 413 for COM 1 port No 414 for COM 2 port Communication Format setting The default settings for the communication Char Bit 8 Bits format are as shown at the right Parity onanan Odd To change the communication format to match stopBit 1 Bit an external device connected to the COM port terminator CR enter the settings for the various items Heade irrarrabat ariwa STX not exist No 415 Baud rate communication speed setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the communication speed to match the external device connected to the COM port
57. in lt gt Figure 31 FP Installation using two expansion units Installation and Wiring FPS When using the flat type mounting plate AFP0804 Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the flat type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below g H g je jiu 60 0 mm 2 36 in i fi o q Figure 32 FP Installation optional flat type mounting plate Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom of the unit Align the expansion hooks with the mounting plate and press the hooks on the top and bottom Installation Removal 1443 14 dh i 1943 14 Figure 33 FP Installation using flat type mounting plate An unit with an attached flat type mounting plate can also be installed sideways ona DIN rail DIN rail Figure 34 FP Installation on DIN rail using flat type mounting plate it Note The flat type mounting plate AFP0804 should be used only with the control unit as a stand alone unit It should not be used when the control unit is being used in combination with an FPO expansion unit or FP gt expansion unit FPS 5 2 Wiring of Power Supply 5 2 Wiring of Power Suppl This section explains power supply wiring of FP 5 2 1 Wiring of Power Suppl Use the power supply cable provided as an accessory t
58. in transmission buffer F159 MTRN instruction EPEE a Transmission L H4142434445464740 gt Device with RS232C port CARCHEEGH ABC DEFGH Figure 171 FP Data transmission explanatory diagram Explanation of data table This is used as a data table for transmission starting at the data register specified in S ae At the beginning of transmission the number of bytes to be transmitted is set At the end of transmission O is set wn Transmission data S 2 storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission gt S n 2n Gnd Figure 172 FP Data table for transmission Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data storage area specified in S Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS Explanation during transmission This is used as a data table for transmission starting at the data register specified in S K When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on operation is as follows when the transmission done flag R9039 R 9049 is on 1 n is presetin S The reception done flag R9038 R 9048 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to 0 2 The setdata is transmitted in order from the lower order byte in S 1 of the table During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 R 9049
59. instruction should be written in an interrupt program and used in period interrupts R12 _ F1 DMV H10 DT600 F1 DMV K500 DT602 F1 DMV K8660 DT604 F1 DMV K 5000 DT606 F1 DMV K9396 DT608 F1 DMV K 3420 DT610 F176 SPCH DT600 KO Assume thatthe execution conditions for this instruction always hold When the execution conditions are off pulse output stops Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis CH2 ata composite speed of 2 000 Hz and the two axes are controlled so thata circular path is followed to the target position In the program operation is being carried out in the mode in which absolute and pass positions are specified Pulses are output from the current position 6 60 Xs 5000 Ys 8660 using circular interpolation control and when the pass position 6 20 Xp 9396 Yp 3420 has been passed pulse output stops at the target position 0 30 Xe 8660 Ye 5000 i Note Assume that the execution conditions for this instruction always hold When the execution conditions are off pulse output stops High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FP When the program is run the data table and positioning path are as shown below Positioning data table Pass position setting method DT600 DT601 DT602 DT603 DT604 Control code H10 Composite speed 500 Hz Target value X axis DT605 CHO 8660 pulses DT606
60. is turned on the mode of use selected in system register No 412 takes effect Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS Chapter 10 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function DO PS EINK see cb iret ane untet Eten meus ie 10 3 10 2 Communication Parameter Settings 10 5 10 3 Monitoring When a PLC Link is Being Used 10 17 10 4 Connection Example of PLC Link 10 18 10 5 PLC Link Response Time 205 10 22 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP 10 2 FP 10 1 PLC Link 10 1 PLC Link This section explains about the overview of PLC link function 10 1 1 Overview of Function What is the PLC Link The PLC link is an economic way of linking two PLCs using a twisted pair cable Data is shared between the PLCs using a link relay L and a link register LD With a PLC link the statuses of the link relays and link registers for one PLC are automatically fed back to other PLCs on the same network The PLC link is notset to be used in the default settings so the setting of system register No 412 should be changed to PLC Link in order to use the function The various PLC units and link areas are allocated using the system registers F or more detailed information please see page 10 5 Communication Parameter Settings FPS FPS FPE FPS Unit No 1 Unit No 2 Unit No 3 Unit No 4 area Received
61. left side of control unit Expansion on right side of control unit FPO expansion unit FP dedicated expansion unit Expansion possible up to 4 units Expansion possible up to 3 units Control unit Expansion FPX 3 2 Expansion Method of Units for FPO and FP The previously available expansion I O unit or intelligent unit for FPO is expanded by connecting to the right side of control unit Because unit expansion is done using the right side connector for FP 0 expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit no expansion cable is needed Peel the seal on the side of the unit so that the internal right side connector for FPO expansion is exposed Peel the seal Figure 18 Expansion method procedure 1 2 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver Figure 19 Expansion method procedure 2 Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units Arey ANA PSEA Figure 21 Expansion method procedure 4 FPS 3 3 Expansion Method of FP Expansion Unit 3 3 Expansion Method of FP gt Expansion Unit The dedicated expansion unit for FP is expanded by connecting to the left side of the control unit Because unit expansion is done using the left side connector for FP
62. on Error tab 2 Turn on No 4 Alarm Battery Error check box PLC Configuration setting dialog box Heth esni Counter iam het Tool Port DORM Pern DOME Fert Hell Mer heid Hokd Herchold2 0 Acta om Ever Tine Lk E kat Die esting kupia catput E Hagi Se veers g T eiir a a ii hos Sa whe een Se iah Figure 57 FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box Specifying the hold area In order to use backup functions such as data registers settings must be entered for system registers Nos 6 to 12 For hold area setting using FPWIN GR select PLC Configuration on the Option menu and click on Hold Non hold 1 and Hold Non hold 2 Installation and Wiring FPS 5 7 3 Lifetime of Backup Battery The life of the backup battery will eventually expire and therefore it is important to replace it with a new battery periodically R efer to the table below fora guide as to when to replace the battery Battery lifetime 220 days or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 840 days at 25 C 70 F Suggested replacement interval 1 year Value when no power at all is supplied Maintenance battery Battery for FP AFPG804 i Notes e If system register No 4 Alarm Battery Error is set to ON special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops and the ERROR ALARM LED will flash The battery remains effective for about a we
63. order to prevent the generation of heat CORRECT Figure 23 FP Installation heat discharge Do not install the FP control unit as shown below INCORRECT Upside down Installation which Installations such that Input and output Horizontal blocks the air duct the input and output connectors on top installation of the unit connectors face down Figure 24 FP Installation direction Do notinstall the unitabove devices which generate heat such as heaters transformers or large scale resistors FP gt 5 1 Installation Installation space Leave at least 50 mm 1 97 in of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm 1 97 in or more 50 mm 1 97 in or more Figure 25 FP Installation space 1 Maintain a minimum of 100 mm 3 937 in between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 100 mm 3 937 in or more Panel door PLC unit Other device Figure 26 FP Installation space 2 Keep the first 100 mm 3 937 in from the front surface of the control unit open in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring Installation and Wiring FPS 5 1 2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail The FP unit enables simple attachment to DIN r
64. page 6 6 A a Example 1 When using only one channel CHO up to 100 kHz can be used A a Example 2 When using two channels CHO and CH2 up to 60 kHz may be used for each channel Af Example 3 When linear interpolation control is being carried out on CHO and CH2 a composite speed of up to 100 kHz may be used for the pulse output function When circular interpolation control is being carried out the maximum composite speed that may be used is 20 kHz If using both the pulse output function and the high speed counter function the following combinations result A a Example 1 When using one pulse output channel with a maximum output of 60 kHz the maximum counting speed of the high speed counter is 20 kHz in the single phase and three channels mode A a Example 2 When using one pulse output channel with a maximum output of 60 kHz the maximum counting speed of the high speed counter is 15 kHz in the two phase and one channel mode t Note The linear and circular interpolation control functions can be used with the C32T2 control unit only FPE 6 2 Function Specifications and R estricted Items 6 2 3 Booting Time The booting time is the time from when the instruction is executed to the time that the pulse is actually output Type of instruction Booting time Pulse output instruction F171 SPDH If CW CCW is set approx 200us trapezoidal control home return approx 400us If Pulse Sign is set a
65. sensor 5 12 PLC link 7 5 10 3 PLC link function specification 13 9 PLC link function specifications 7 9 Positioning control instruction F171 6 24 6 26 Programming tools 1 9 Protect error 12 10 Proximity sensor 5 12 Pulse output 13 7 FPS Index Pulse output control instruction F0 6 41 Pulse output function 6 3 6 20 Pulse output function specifications 6 6 Pulse output instruction F172 6 29 Pulse output method 6 21 Pulse Sign output method 6 21 PWM output function 6 3 6 56 PWM output instruction 6 56 PWM output specifications 13 7 R Receiving data from external device 9 12 Relative value positioning operation 6 44 6 46 Relays 13 12 Removal method 5 6 Response 8 5 Response message 8 6 Restrictions on unit combinations 1 7 RUN PROG mode switch 2 4 S Safety measures 5 22 Self diagnostic error 12 5 13 43 Self diagnostic function 12 3 Serial communication specifications 1 1 communication 7 8 13 8 Serial communication specifications 1 N communication 7 8 13 8 Short circuit protective circuit 5 15 Slim 30 type mounting plate 5 7 Software environment 1 9 Special internal relays 13 21 Specifications 13 3 Start up sequence 5 22 Status indicator LEDs 2 4 12 3 Subtraction input mode 6 10 Suitable cable 1 9 Suitable wire 7 11 Syntax check erro
66. specified range Read system register Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Remote control Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort Aborts communication 13 66 FP 13 10 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 13 10 Hexadecimal Binary BCD Hexadecimal Binary data BCD data Binary Coded Decimal woo NOURWNE OS 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0111 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0000 1010 0000 0000 0000 1011 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0111 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0001 1010
67. string consist ing of a specified number of characters from the speci fied position in the character string Writing a char acter string to a character string S1 S2 D n These instructions write a specified number of charac ters from a character string to a specified position in the character string Replacing character strings A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the character string 13 60 FP 13 8 Table of Instructions Integer type data pro Maximum value word data 16 bit Maximum value double word data 32 bit cessing instructions Searches the maximum value in the word data table between the S1 and S2 and stores itin the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D Searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Minimum value word data 16 bit Searches for the minimum value in the word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 Minimum value double word data 32 bit Total and mean values word data 16 bit Total and mean values double word data 32 bit Sort word data
68. table headed by DT 200 pulses are output from CHO 2 Suseda 8S Fee 8 OS SS SS SS SS Se Pulses are output from CHO R903A R40 TO Ra dN pees eed an ene a yy eet ee ot DF Positioning done pulse 1 s _ R42 ee ae eae TMX 0 K 10 0 15 type timer Moe se ef ee ee a Sa a ee DF Eo MV H10 DT 90052 Near home deceleration start _ Fo mv HO DT 90052 _ Figure 116 FPE Sample program home return operation program Pulse output diagram Proximity sensor Home sensor XA on X3 on X2 on 2 000 Hz 100 Hz 0 Hz 150 ms 150 ms Figure 117 FPX Sample program home return operation pulse output diagram High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Home return operation plus direction When XA turns on a pulse is output from CW output Y 0 of specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X3 turns on deceleration begins and when X2 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value area DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0 0V 24 V DC FP Home return fa Da strt Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor driver Proximity sensor Home sensor Figure 118 FPE Sample program home return operation direction FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Function Program XA R903A R52 ROOF p ces ee E DF Positioning operat
69. the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data rounding the first decimal point down Floating point type data rounding the first decimal point off Floating point type data sign changes Floating point type data absolute The decimal part of the real number data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in D 1 D The decimal part of the real number data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the resultis stored in D 1 D The real number data stored in S 1 S is changed the sign and the result is stored in D 1 D Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data degree radian Floating point type data radian degree The data in degrees of an angle specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees and the resultis stored in D 1 D FP 13 8 Table of Instructions Floating point type real number data processing instructions F347 Floating point type data compare Floating point type data band compare Floating point type data upper and lower limit control 1 2 53 S141
70. when an error is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R906D i Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R906E i j Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R906F i i Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode 13 26 FP 13 5 Table of Special Internal Relays MEWNET WO PLC link operation mode relay Description Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni Turns on when uni Turns off when uni is is in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the RUN mode in
71. with sign specified by S 1 S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D Floating point type data to 32 bit inte ger conversion rounding the first decimal point down to integer Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D 13 63 Specifications FPS s D 31 Floating point i Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the type data to 16 bit integer conversion rounding the first decimal point off to integer 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D Floating point type data to 32 bit integer conversion rounding the first decimal point off to integer Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to
72. 0 Figure 48 FP Pressure connection tool Installation and Wiring FPS Procedure of assembly Wiring method The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire s insulation saving labor q Bend the welder contact back from the carrier and set it in the pressure connection tool Figure 49 FPE MIL connector assembly procedure 1 Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops and lightly grip the tool Figure 50 FPE MIL connector assembly procedure 2 G After press fitting the wire insert it into the housing Figure 51 FP MIL connector assembly procedure 3 When all wires has been inserted fit the semi cover into place Figure 52 FPE MIL connector assembly procedure 4 FPS 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure connected the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact B Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that y the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section AC aC Figure 53 FP MIL connector rewiring a E ae o N Tip If using a MIL connector for flat cables specify the product no AXM 110915 Installation and Wiring FPS 9 5 __Wiring of Terminal Block Type A screw down connection type for terminal block is used The suitable wires are given below Terminal block sock
73. 0 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental PLS and SIGN forward off reverse on 03 Incremental PLS and SIGN forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute PLS and SIGN forward off reverse on 13 Absolute PLS and SIGN forward on reverse off 2 Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 KHz K1 to K9800 units Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approximately 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 KHz K48 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approximately 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 KHz K191 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approximately 0 8 kHz 3 Acceleration deceleration time ms K constant With 30 steps K30 to K32767 With 60 steps K36 to K32767 4 Target value K constant K 2147483648 to K2147483647 Figure 93 FP Control code of F171 instruction High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Positioning control instruction F171 home return Performs home return according to the specified data table Pulses are output from Y1 and a return to the home position is carried out at an initial speed of 100 Hz a maximum speed of 2 000 Hz and an acceleration deceleration time of 150 ms XA HDF F1 DMV H1121 DT200 F1 DMV K100 DT202 F1 DMV K2000 DT204 F1 DMV KO DT208 F1 DMV K150 DT206 F171 SPDH DT200 KO Figure 94 FP Program of positioning control instruction F171
74. 0 to X19F 9 C0Nd expansion X260 a XSF Third expansion Y340 to Y35F X340 to X35F_ Fourth expansion FP 4 1 1 0 Allocation 4 1 3 1 0 Number of FPO Expansion Unit for right side expansion I O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location x o err ear eer E8YR E8YT E8YP Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y 40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16X Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16YT E16YP Output 16 points Y 20 to Y2F Y 40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output 16 points Y 20 to Y2F Y 40 to Y4F Y 60 to Y 6F Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 E16R E16T E16P E32T E32P 4 1 4 1 0 Number of FPO Analog I O Unit for right side expansion The 1 0 allocation of FPO analog I O unit FPO0 A21 is determined by the installation location CHO 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F WX4 X40 to X4F WX6 X60 to X6F CH1 16 points WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F WX7 X70 to X7F Output 16 points WY2 Y20 to Y2F WY 4 Y40 to Y4F WY6 Y60 to Y6F 4 1 5 1 0 Number of FPO A D Conversion Unit for right side expansion The I O allocation of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 is determined by the installation location The data for the various channels is convert
75. 056 DT90057 Clock calendar monitor hour minute Clock calendar setting minute second Clock calendar setting day hour Clock calendar setting year month Clock calendar setting day of the week A Available N A Not available Hour and minute data of the clock calendar are stored here This data is read only data it cannot be overwritten Higher byte Lower byte Hour data Minute data H00 to H23 HOO to H59 The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the calendar timer is stored The built in calen dar timer will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The calendar timer can be set the time set by writing a value using a programming tool software ora program that uses the FO MV instruction Higher byte Lower byte pee ee Te TR PTE PETE Td Second data HOO to H59 Hour data HOO to H23 Month data HO1 to H12 Day of the week data HOO to H06 DT90054 Minute data H00 to H59 Day data H01 to H31 Year data H0O to H99 DT90055 DT90056 DT90057 13 32 FP 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers A Available N A Not available DT90058 Clock calendar time setting and 30 seconds correction register The clock calendar is adjusted as follows When setting the clock calendar by program By setting the the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time be comes that written to
76. 1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz 3 Target value K 2147483648 to K2147483647 The value of the 32 bit data specified for the target value should be within the range indicated in the table below Specification of control code i ai PEIEE ange of allowable et values Operation mode Output method g i Addition counting Specifies a positive value Subtraction counting Specifies a negative value Absolute Addition counting Specifies a value larger than the current value Subtraction counting Specifies a value smaller than the current value Pulse output diagram Frequency speed Hz 5 000 900 f Elapsed value of PEATE ETE Ons high speed E l l counter 01000 3000 8000 10000 Amount of travel Trigger Ft p R903A l R903C When the execution condition trigger R10 of the F174 SPOH instruction goes on the high speed counter control flag R903A R903C goes on When the elapsed value reaches 10 000 and pulse output stops R903A R903C goes off High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FP Pulse output instruction F175 Linear interpolation The linear interpolation controls with two axes according to the specified data table R11 HDF F1 DMV H1000 DT500 F1 DMV K500 DT502 F1 DMV K5000 DT504 F1 DMV K5000
77. 1 1 S1 D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D lt When S 1 1 S1 s S3 1 S3 lt 2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 D 1 D 16 bit data deadband control When S1 gt S3 S3 S1 gt D When S2 lt S3 S3 S2 D When S1 S3 S2 0 D 32 bit data deadband control When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 1 S3 1 3 s S2 1 S2 0 D 1 D 13 61 Specifications FPS Integer type data processing instructions F289 16 bit data zone control When S3 lt 0 3 S1 D When S3 0 0 D When S3 gt 0 3 S2 D F290 32 bit data zone control Floating point type real number operation Floating point type data move When S3 1 S3 lt 0 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D instructions S 1 S D 1 D Floating point type data addition Floating point type data subtraction Floating point type data multiplication Floating point type data division S1 1 1 S2 1 S2 D 1 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D S1 1 S1 x S2 1 2 gt D 1 D S1 1 1 2 1 S2 D 1 D Floating point type data sine operation SIN S 1 S D 1 D Floating point type d
78. 10 GT30 ommand message Response message RS232C Figure 151 FPE Computer link connection example GT10 Communication cassette used for 1 1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1 1 computer link communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPX Communication cassette five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS control is FPG COM1 possible This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPX Communication cassette three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 2 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 FPS 8 2 Connection Example with External Device Setting of system register To carry out 1 1 communication using a computer link the system registers should be set as shown below Communication format setting for FP side e Settings when using the COM 1 port No 412 Communication mode for COM 1 port Computer link Communication format for COM 1 port Character bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM 1 port 19200 bps e Settings when using the COM 2 port Communication mode for COM 2 port Computer link Communicatio
79. 102 DT101 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 Figure 194 FP Example transmission buffer Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS When receiving data The data of received area being read is ASCII code data Af w Example When the data 12345 p is transmitted from a device with RS232C port If DT200 is being used as the received buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 Figure 195 FP Example received buffer FPS 9 5 1 N Communication 9 5 1 N Communication This section explains about the 1 N communication of general purpose Serial communication 9 5 1 Overview of 1 N Communication The FP and the external unit with the unit number are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external unit the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data FPS Data register DT C S gt Transmitted data Cy Ge Data transmission using F159 MTRN instruction Data is received into received buffer Data is sent and received through the data registers Figure 196 FP General purpose serial communication 1 N communication 9 5 2 Comm
80. 16 bit 1 2 53 Searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 The total value and the mean value of the word data with sign from the area selected with S1 to the S2 are stored in the D The total value and the mean value of the double word data with sign from the area selected with S1 to S2 are stored in the D The word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Sort double word data 32 bit Scaling of 16 bit data Scaling of 32 bit data F285 16 bit data upper and lower limit control 1 2 53 SCAL 1 2 D DSCAL 1 2 D The double word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling for the given data table The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling for the given data table When S1 gt S3 1 D When S2 lt S3 S2 gt D When S13 S3 S2 S3 D 32 bit data upper and lower limit control When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S
81. 2 The target value 32 bit data of the high speed A N A counter target counter specified by the high speed counter value instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various DT90203 instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 F167 F171 F175 or F176 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction DT90204 High speed Forch3 The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed A A counter elapsed counter is stored here The value can be read and DT90205 value written by executing F1 DMV instruction 13 38 FPS 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers A Available N A Not available Address Name oeseri reading wt DT90206 High speed The target value 32 bit data of the high speed A N A counter target counter specified by the high speed counter value instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various DT90207 instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 or F167 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction DT90208 Not used N A N A to DT90218 13 39 Specifications FP DT90227 PLC link unit station No l or9 PLC link unit station No 2 or 10 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis
82. 2 control units are equipped with this connector but the FPG C32T is not 2 Unit No Station No setting switch This unit No station No is specified when using the communication functions provided on the optional communication cassettes The unit No station No setting switch is located under the cover on the back of the unit Specify the unit station number using the selector switch and the dial Figure 9 FP Parts and Functions Unit No setting switch 3 Communication cassette option This is the optional cassette type adapter used when communication is carried out Any one of the following the cassette types may be installed 1 channel RS232C type 2 channel RS232C type 1 channel RS 485 type Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units The hook is also used for installation on flat type mounting plate AFP 0804 Right side connector for FPO expansion Connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit 6 DIN rail attachment lever The FP unit enables attachment ata touch to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on slim 30 type mounting plate AF P0811 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit FPS 2 1 2 Tool Port Specification A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit Pinno Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction Signal Ground Transmitted Data Unit
83. 288 to 303 Step ladder pro cess 304 to 319 Step ladder pro cess 320 to 335 Step ladder pro cess 336 to 351 Step ladder pro cess 352 to 367 Step ladder pro cess 368 to 383 Step ladder pro cess 384 to 399 Step ladder pro cess 400 to 415 Step ladder pro cess 416 to 431 Step ladder pro cess 432 to 447 Step ladder pro cess 448 to 463 Step ladder pro cess 464 to 479 Step ladder pro cess 480 to 495 Step ladder pro cess 496 to 511 Step ladder pro cess 512 to 527 Step ladder pro cess 528 to 543 DT90094 Step ladder pro cess 544 to 559 DT90095 Step ladder pro cess 560 to 575 DT90096 Step ladder pro cess 576 to 591 DT90097 Step ladder pro cess 592 to 607 A Available N A Not available Name Description Reading Writing Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the proccess starts up the bit corresponding to the process number turns on 1 Monitor using binary display Example 15 11 7 0 Bit No DT90060 3 15 11 7 3 0 Process No 1 Executing 0 N ot executing A programming tool software can be used to write data 13 35 Specifications FPS A Available N A Not available A A DT90098 Step ladder pro cess 608 to 623 Step ladder pro cess 624 to 639 Step ladder pro cess 640 to 655 Step ladder pro
84. 70 MEWNET WO Duplicated destination for PLC inter link address DT90171 bee nk Stats Counts how many times a token is lost DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 No of times undefined commands have been received DT90175 No of times sum check errors have occurred during reception DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in re ceived data No of times transmission errors have occurred No of times procedural errors have occurred No of times overlapping parent units have occurred DT90180 Not used to DT90189 DT90190 igh speed counter control This monitors the data specified in DT90052 ag monitor for chO 43210 DT90191 High speed counter contro ag monitor for ch1 DT90192 igh speed counter control Home near input Invalid 1 Valid ag monitor for ch2 High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output Continue 1 Stop A Hard t Enable 1 Disab DT90193 gh speed counter control 20ra rese napis i Disable ag monitor for ch3 Count Enable 1 Disable Software reset No 1 Yes DT90194 Notused N A N A to DT90199 DT90200 High speed Forch2 The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed A A counter elapsed counter is stored here The value can be read and DT90201 value written by executing F1 DMV instruction DT90202 High speed Forch
85. 9009 Partial 1 0 Updates the I O from the number specified by D1 to update the number specified by D2 Only possible for I O numbers in a range of X0 to XF and YO to YF Printout PR Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and outputs it to the word external out put relay WY specified by D m m gt W Self diagnostic Stores the self diagnostic error number n in DT90000 error set n K100 turns R9000 on and turns on the ERROR ALARM LED to K299 F149 Message S Displays the character constant of S in the connected display programming tool F157 Time addition CADD The time after S2 1 S2 elapses from the time of S142 S1 1 1 is stored in D 2 D D Time CSUB The time that results from subtracting S2 1 S2 from substruction the time S142 S1 1 1 is stored in D 2 D D F159 Serial data MTRN This is used to send data to or receive data from an communication external device through the specified COM RS232C or RS 485 port BIN arithmetic instruction Double word S D 32 bit data square root High speed counter and pulse output control instructions High speed S Performs high speed counter control according to the counter and DT90052 control code specified by S pulse output control Change and S Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter elapsed val read of the DT90044 ue area DT90045 DT90044 Note
86. Battery vcsit eects a tees een ete wee 5 26 FP Table of Contents Chapter6 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 6 1 Overview of Each Functions 20s diade cdc eseaw Seiden hee ed sates 6 3 6 1 1 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed Counter 6 3 6 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter 6 4 6 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 00 eee 6 5 6 2 1 Table of Specifications ii Wud fun taddieea se bene eee dehy 2 6 5 6 2 2 Function being Used and Restrictions 6 7 6 2 Boung TING fox tet calor aeGee alter Veen eens 6 9 6 3 High speed Counter Function cece cece eet nett 6 10 6 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function 6 10 6 3 2 Types of input Modes svi ics cevesetes vive dies OY eeneee ede 6 10 6 3 3 Min Input Pulse Width co t ccat eee ett he titers eee etd 6 12 6 3 4 I O Allocation n 6 12 6 3 5 Instructions Used with High speed Counter Function 6 13 6 3 6 Sample ProgiaM iiss kinie u a E OEA i UUE T 6 16 6 4 Pulse Output Function aaiae 6 20 6 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function n a iaa 6 20 6 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method cece cece ee eee 6 21 6 4 3 WO Allocation ccievtese tee tenttees tees pele es 6 22 6 4 4 Control Mode encce cxtes hen re sea nes whee idea Peewee eee 6 23 6 4 5 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function 6 24 6 4 6 Sample Program for Positioning Control
87. CCW Motor driver side 8000 pulses AAAA AAAY Figure 109 FP Sample program relative value positioning operation direction DT109 arget value Movement amount 8 000 pulses DT110 DT111 F1DMV K 8000 DT108 FIDMV KO DT 110 Pulse stop Control code H11 00 Duty 1 4 25 _ 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW F171 SPDH DT 100 KO Tt a ee The data table headed by DT 100 The data table headed by DT100 is used and is used Program x9 R903A R22 R207 ots ae ts a Se a HF Positioning operation running I R20 0 R20 R2 I kes eee Ha ne HoF _ ____________ Positioning operation start R21 Positioning data table DT102 DT104 M d 6 000 H FipMv K6000 DT104 EAU SPES DT106 Acceleration time 300 msec FipMv K300 DT 106 DT107 _ pulses are output from CHO J Pulses are output from CHO R903A R20 TO R225 P me ae a ep a eh HoF Positioning done pulse 1 second o R22 E ees ee TMX On KELO 0 1 s type timer Figure 110 FPX Sample program relative value positioning operation program 6 46 FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output diagram 6 000 Hz 8 000 pulses 1 000 Hz 0 Hz 300 ms 300 ms Figure 111 FPE Sample program pulse output diagram High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Absolute value positioning operation When X1 is turned on pulse
88. Click on the button and selectone of the values from 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps on the displayed pull down menu 8 1 6 Restriction Either the computer link mode or the general purpose communication mode can be used for the communication cassette COM port There are no restrictions when multiple ports are used 8 10 FPS 8 2 Connection Example with External Device 8 2 Connection Example with External Device This section explains about the connection example with external device for computer link 8 2 1 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with computer Outline To use a 1 1 computer link with a computer an RS232C cable is used to setup a 1 1 connection between the FP and the computer Communication is carried out by the PLC sending responses to commands sent from the computer side Computer ommand message lt lt Response message RS232C Figure 148 FPE Computer link connection example computer Communication cassette used for 1 1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1 1 computer link communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPx Communication cassette five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible FPG COM1
89. DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction Example Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on x0 Inputs 0 minutes LDF HO MV H 0 DT90054 J and 0 seconds Inputs 12th FO MV H 512 DT90055 hour 5th day FO MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time If you changed the values of DT90054 to DT90057 with the programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with X0 turns on xo Correctto 0 H DF Fo mv H 1 DT90058 Second At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if the between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 second and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 second 13 33 Specifications FP A Available N A Not available DT90059 Seria communication error code Error code is stored here when a communication error occurs DT90060 Step ladder process 0 to 15 DT90061 adder 16 t
90. E Ee Pe eH amea f Ie KONSE Figure 17 FP Terminal layout diagram I O connector LEE Connector front view i Notes e The two terminals of output circuit are connected internally e The two terminals of output circuit are connected internally 2 3 2 Control Unit for C24R 2 Input 0 co X0 X8 co X0 X8 t Note The two COM terminals of input circuit are not connected internally Output YO lt lt Io lt lt es lt ul lt ol lt COMH Powe Connector front view Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Expansion Type of Expansion Unit ausa 3 3 Expansion Method of Units for FPO and FP 3 4 Expansion Method of FP Expansion Unit 3 5 Specifications of FP Expansion Unit 3 6 Expansion FPS FP 3 1 Type of Expansion Unit 3 1 Type of Expansion Unit Expansion I O units power supply units and intelligent units from the earlier F P0 series can be used with the FPX in addition to the dedicated expansion units designed expressly for the F P Expansion units used for the earlier FPO series are connected on the right side of the control unit just as they were with the FP 0 Dedicated expansion units for the FP are connected to the left side of the control unit Expansion on
91. ET adapter the maximum number of station numbers that can be specified is 32 Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS 8 3 4 Connection with External Device Connection diagram Wiring should extend from one unit to the next Never run two wires from the same unit to two other units Correct wiring Incorrect wiring To external device with RS485 port FPZ side 5 pin Transmission iner O Transmission line2 To external device with RS 485 port Figure 160 FP Computer link connection diagram With 1 N communication the various RS 485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables The and signals of transmission line 1 and transmission line 2 are connected inside the communication cassette and either port may be used as COM 1 port Setting of terminal station In the PLC that serves as the final unit terminal station the transmission line and the E terminal should be shorted To C NET adapter of computer connection S Shortthe transmission line and the E terminal in the final unit terminal station Figure 161 FPX Computer link terminal station setting Chapter 9 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 General purpose Serial Communication 9 3 Overview of Communication with External Devices 9 8 Connection Example with External Devices
92. Flash ROM without backup battery By using exclusive instructions it is possible to write and read data Program capacity 12 000 steps Number of instruction Operation speed 0 4 us step by basic instruction Operation Relay Differential points External input relay X External output relay Y Internal relay R Timer C ounter T C Link relays L Data register DT Link data register LD Index register I Master control relay points MCR Number of labels J P and LOOP Number of step ladders 512 points 1 184 points 1 184 points Note 7 Note 7 Note 7 512 points 1 184 points 1 184 points Note 7 Note 7 Note 7 1 568 points RO to R97F Note 1 1 024 points Note 1 and 2 for initial setting Timer 1 008 points TO to T1007 Counter 16 points C1008 to C1023 Timer Can countup to in units of 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms or1 s x 32767 Counter Can count up to 1 to 32767 1 024 points Note 1 32 765 words DTO to DT32764 Note 1 me next page 13 5 Specifications FP Number of subroutines Pulse catch input 100 subroutines 8 points XO to X7 Number of interrupt programs 9 programs external input 8 points X0 to X7 periodical inter rupt 1 point 0 5 ms to 30s Self diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer program syntax check Clock calendar function Potentiometer Volume input Batte
93. IN GT Configuration setting screen communication prameters Connection example with programmable display GT10 GT30 When using the 1 channel RS232C type of communication cassette FP side 5 pin GT10 GT30 side 5 pin RD Receved Daa R0 Jem Rs Request Send RS pw Figure 153 FPE Computer link connection example 1 GT10 When using the 2 channel RS232C type of communication cassette FPZ side 5 pin GT10 GT30 side 5 pin Transmitted Data 1 STE a2 _ Recewed bata Ro Cse macom se HA To other device Figure 154 FPE Computer link connection example 2 GT10 FPS 8 2 Connection Example with External Device Basic communication area setting for GT10 GT30 To carry out communication with a PLC the Basic Communication Area setting for the internal device area in the PLC reserved by the programmable display in advance should be specified in the configuration settings When the GT10 GT30 is shipped from the factory the basic communication area for GT10 GT30 is set as shown below GT Configuration settings should be changed to match the application at hand Word area DTO to DT2 Bit area WRO to WR2 The basic communication area is changed using the configuration parameter settings for the programmable display and the GT Configuration item in the GTWIN screen creation tool GTWIN GT Configuration settings Basic Setup screen GT Garie satii 5 al Bme hai irme Peremete
94. Max possible expansion is with a total of four units with a total of three units Figure 22 FP 1 O allocation 4 1 1 I O Number of FP gt Control Unit The I O allocation of FP control unit is fixed Type of control unit 1 0 number FPG C32T Input 16 points X0 to XF FPG C32T2 Output 16 points YO to YF FPG C24R2 Output points 1 0 Allocation FP 4 1 2 I O Number of FP gt Expansion Unit for left side expansion I O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location 3 First Second Third Fourth XY64D2T Input 32 points X100 to X11F X180 to X19F X260 to X27F X340 to X35F Output 32 points Y100 to Y11F Y180 to Y19F Y260 to Y27F Y340 to Y35F t Note The FP gt expansion unit nearest the control unit has the lowest 1 0 number so that the unit closest to the control unit is the first unit the one next to that the second and so on Consequently the I O numbers in the illustration below start with the lowest number at the right and proceed in sequential order i i the 1 0 numbers indicated below i would be used if the FPG C32T or FPG C32T2 was used as the control unit and the XY64D2T was used as FPS control unit X0 to XF YO to YF FP expansion unit 1o to wi First expansion Y180 to Y19 l X18
95. N A The currentscan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1ms Example K50 indicates 5ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1ms Example K50 indicates 5ms The maximum scan time is stored here Scan A time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1ms Example K125 indicates 12 5ms Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In the PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG mode 13 29 Specifications FP A Available N A Not available A N A DT90025 Mask condition monitoring register for interrupts INT 0 to 7 The mask conditions of interrupts using ICTL instruction can be stored here Monitor using binary display 15 11 7 3 23 19 16 INT No 0 interrupt disabled masked 1 interrupt enabled unmasked 0 Bit No DT90026 DT90027 Not used Periodical interrupt interval INT 24 The value set by ICTL instruction is stored KO periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s DT90028 Not used T DT90029 Not used See DT90037 DT90038 Message 0 Message 1 Message 2 M
96. NAiS PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER PEFP gt User s Manual ees ee eee atl Applicable PLC FP gt Control units e FPG C32T e FPG C32T2 e FPG C24R2 7 i This manual was created using Adobe Acrobat Adobe the Adobe logo and Acrobat are trademarks Adobe of Adobe Systems Incorporated Smart Solutions by NAIS http www naisplc com FP Table of Contents Table of Contents Before VOUS sisi seeeeeeoieae eet ieee Obata reese be Peek eee ees viii Programming Tool Restrictions ssssaanu nae xi Compatibility with the FPO ossasuna xii Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit sssusa aaaea 1 3 T UntIyDES rrote erene a a et eh ulna a e tS on Ea 1 6 1 2 1 PRPS Control Unit sssusa 1 6 IZZ FPXExpansiomUNE oiei ganineeieear nnne in e eed 1 6 1 23 Units Tor FPO and FPE ws rosarr a eturka d nisana Tadaa 1 6 1 2 4 Communication Cassette 606 aaa 1 6 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 0 cece eee eee ees 1 7 1 3 1 Restrictions on the Number of Expansion Units for FPO expansion unit ye csay uss Poh te eo eR eee Aes 1 7 1 3 2 Restrictions on the Number of Units for Expansion for FPE expansion unit oaasis 1 8 LA Programming Tools s cud o heya te tick ree e teehee tetas bate iai 1 9 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming c cece eee eee eee 1 9 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable 4 1 9 Chapter 2 Specifications and Funct
97. R L H F183 DSTM S DH Description After set value n x 0 001 seconds timer contact a is setto on After set value n x 0 01 seconds timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 0 1 seconds timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 1 second timer contact a is set to on After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and R900D are set to on After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and R900D are set to on Counter UP DOWN counter Shift register Left right shift register CT F118 UDC Control instructions Master control relay F119 LRSR 7 D1 D2 Master control relay end Hmc nH Master control area MCE n Decrements from the preset value n Increments or decrements from the preset value S based on up down input Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal relay WR data to the left Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range specified by D1 and D2 to the left or to the right Starts the master control program Ends the master control program Jump Label i Note r nH LBL n The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there When TM256 or higher or CT256 or higher is set the number of steps is the number in parenthes
98. Received Received area arga Received i Transmitted area area The link relays and link registers of the various PLCs contain areas where data is sent and areas where data is received and these are used to share data among the PLCs Figure 201 FPE PLC link function overview 10 3 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP Overview of PLC link operation Link relay Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all of the other PLCs on the same network Link register If the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all of the PLCs on the same network Link relay If the link relay LO for the unit No 1 is turned on the status change is fed back to the ladder programs of other units and the Y0 of the other units is output RS485 No 2 Link register foo Go x No 3 Link register E m wor No 4 Link register fool m nS RO HFo mv K100 LD0 No 1 Link register q Link register If a constant of 100 is written to the LDO of unit No 1 the contents of LDO in unit No 2 are also changed to a constant of 100 Figure 202 FPE Overview of PLC link operation 10 4 FPS 10 2 Communication Parameter Settings 10 2 Communication Parameter Settings This section explains about communication parameter settings when using PLC link func
99. S D S gt D 5 move F1 32 bit data DMV S D S 1 S D 1 D 7 move 16 bit data in MV S D 5 D 5 vert and move 32 bit data in DMV S 1 5 D 1 D 7 vert and move 7 S D Bit data move S n D The specified one bit in S is transferred to the speci fied one bitin D The bit is specified by n Hexadecimal S n D The specified one digit in S is transferred to the speci digit 4 bit fied one digit in D The digit is specified by n data move Two 16 bit data MV2 S1 S2 D S1 D move S2 D 1 Two 32 bit data DMV2 S1 S2 D S1 1 1 gt D 1 D move S2 1 S2 D 3 D 2 Block move BKMV S1 S2 D The data between S1 and S2 is transferred to the area starting at D Block copy COPY S D1 D2 The data of S is transferred to the all area between DL and D2 Data read from ICRD S1 S2 D The data stored in the F ROM specified by S1 and F ROM S2 are transferred to the area starting at D Data write to PICWT S1 S2 D The data specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to F ROM the F ROM starting at D F15 16 bit data XCH D1 D2 D1 D2 D2 gt D1 exchange 32 bit data DXCH D1 D2 D1 1 D1 D2 1 D2 exchange D2 1 D2 D1 1 D1 i m N i m N Higher lower The higher byte and lower byte of D are exchanged byte in 16 bit data exchang
100. S1 gt S2 1 S2 R900A on S141 1 S2 1 S2 R900B on S141 1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on S141 S1 gt S3 1 S3 R900A on S2 1 2 S141 S1 s S3 1 S3 gt R900B on S141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on When S141 1 gt S3 1 3 1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S241 S2 lt S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S141 1 s S3 1 S3 s S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 gt D 1 D Process control instruction F373 F374 Floating point type data dead band control Floating point type data zone control PID processing 16 bit data revision detection 32 bit data revision detection When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 s S3 1 S3 s S2 1 S2 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 lt 0 0 S341 S3 S1 1 S1 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 0 S341 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 If the data in the 16 bit area specified by S has changed since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution If the data in the 32 bit area specified by S 1 S has chan
101. Schweiz AG France Matsushita Electric Works France S A R L Italy Matsushita Electric Works Italia s r l Benelux Matsushita Electric Works Benelux B V North amp South America http www aromat com spain Matsushita Electric Works Espa a S A HUSA Aromat Corporation SPortugal Matsushita Electric Works Espa a S A Portuguese Branch Office 629 Central Ave New Providence N J 07974 U S A Czech Matsushita Electric Works CZ s r o Tel 1 908 464 3550 Headquarters Scandinavia Matsushita Electric Works Scandinavia AB SNew J ersey wn 4 SGeorgia gt aA SMassachusetts Sillinois ak STexas SCalifornia Los Angeles San J ose SMichigan Canada Aromat Canada Inc nt E Singapore Matsushita Electric Works Asia Pacific Pte Ltd Representative Office a nemen Paad 25 03 05 United Square Singapore 307591 SIndonesia Malaysia Matsushita Electric Works Malaysia Sdn Bhd SVietnam Thailand Matsushita Electric Works Sales Thailand Co Ltd SPhilippines U A E Matsushita Electric Works Middle East FZE SIndia E China Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Suite 201 Level 2 Tower W3 The Toners Oriental Plaza No 1 STurkey East Chang An Ave Dong Cheng District Beijing 100005 China SBrazil Tel 86 10 8518 1302 1303 Beijing Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Shanghai Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Shanghai Branch Office Guangzhou Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Guangzhou Branch Office Dalian
102. Targetvalue Y axis DT607 CH2 5000 pulses Pass value X axis CHO 9396 pulses Pass value Y axis CH2 3420 pulses Setting area Designated with user pro gram DT608 DT609 DT610 DT611 DT612 Radius DT613 10000 pulses DT614 X axis CHO DT615 Center position 0 pulse DT616 Y axis CH2 DT617 Center position 0 pulse Operation result storage area Parameters for each axis component cal culated due to in struction execution are stored here Positioning path Counterclockwise direction Left rotation Clockwise direction Right rotation x Y CH2 X CH0 Center position O Xo Yo Target position E Xe Ye Let CHO be the X axis and CH2 be the Y axis Pass position P Xp Yp Center position setting method DT600 DT601 DT602 DT603 DT604 DT605 DT606 DT607 DT608 DT609 DT610 DT611 DT612 DT613 Control code H110 Composite speed 2000 Hz Targetvalue X axis CHO 8660 pulses Target value Y axis Setting area CH2 5000 pulses X axis CHO Center position 0 pulse Y axis CH2 Center position 0 pulse Radius 10000 pulses Operation result storage area Fv Composite speed O Xo Yo Center point Center position Fx X axis component speed S Xs Ys Start point Current position Fy Y axis component speed P Xp Yp Pass point Pass position r Radius E Xe Ye End point Targe
103. This section contains input and output specifications of FP control unit 2 2 1 Input Specifications Input specifications for all type Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current For X0 X1 X3 X4 approx 8 mA For X2 X5 to X7 approx 4 3 mA For X8 to XF approx 3 5 mA Input points per common For C32T C32T2 16 points common For C24R2 8 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current For X0 X1 X3 X4 19 2 V DC 6 mA For X2 X5 to XF 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 V DC 1 3 mA Input impedance For X0 X1 X3 X4 3 kQ For X2 X5 to X7 5 6 kQ For X8 to XF 6 8 kQ Response time For input XO X1 X3 X4 1 ms orless normal input 5 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For input X2 X5 to X7 1 ms orless normal input 100 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For input X8 to XF 1 ms orless normal input only on off Same as above Operating mode indicator LED display i Note X0 through X7 are inputs for the high speed counter and have a fast response time If used as normal inputs we recommend inserting a timer in the ladder program as chattering and noise may be interpreted as an input signal Also the above specifications apply when the rat
104. This shows the status of the data table when the above program is run The received number of DT200 bytes is stored as datais DT200 to DT204 are used as the reception stored buffer System register settings are as fol DT201 H42 B H41 A lows System register 416 K200 DT202 H44 D H43 C Received data is stored in i l order from the lower order System register 417 K5 DT203 H46 F H45 E Pyte DT204 H48 H H47 G Reception buffer when receptionis completed Figure 178 FP Data table for reception received buffer Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the RS232C portis stored in the data registers that have been set as the reception buffer The number of bytes received is stored in this area Reception data storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of storage Figure 179 FP Data table for reception Data registers are used for the reception buffer Specify the data registers in system registers 416 to 419 The number of bytes of data received is stored in the starting address of the reception buffer The initial value is 0 Received data is stored in the received data storage area in order from the lower order byte Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS Explanation during reception When the reception done flag R9038 R9048 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sen
105. WM Linear and circular interpolation control can be used only with the FP Control Unit C32T2 e Serial data communication function With the FP please be aware that the following changes have been made to instructions concerning serial data communication Serial data communication F144 TRNS F159 MTRN The F159 MTRN instruction is used only with an FP in which the conventional F144 TRNS instruction has been set up to correspond to multiple communication ports Please be aware that the conventional F144 TRNS instruction cannot be used with the F P xii Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit 1 3 12 gt TI TV BCS she t aea eta els ee be ee an te 1 6 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 7 1 4 Programming Tools a c scey le oie ie a eee tai os 1 9 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit FPS FPS 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit Powerful control capabilities All of the functions of a mid scale PLC are packed into the compact body size of the 32 point type FPO A program capacity of 12 k steps is provided as a standard feature so you never have to worry about how much memory is left as you re programming In addition 32 k words are reserved for data registers so large volumes of data can be compiled and multiple operations can be processed without running ou
106. a Example H100 gt K100 32 bit binary Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by S 1 data 8 digit S to eight digits of BCD data and stores itin D 1 D BCD data 8 digit BCD Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by data 32 bit S 1 S to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 binary data D 16 bit data in Inverts each bit of data of D vert 16 bit data Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the complement of sign 2 32 bit data Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts complement of the sign 2 F87 16 bitdataab ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of D 3 solute F88 32 bitdataab DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of D 1 D 3 solute aes 16 bit data sign EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 D extension Decode DECO S n D Decodes part of the data of S and stores itin D The partis specified by n 7 segment SEGT S D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 segment display decode and stores itin D 1 D Encode ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and stores itin D The partis specified by n 16 bit data The least significant digit of each of the n words of digit combine data beginning at S are stored united in order in D 16 bit data Each of the digits of the data of S are stored in digit distri
107. a I a Perce ao mo w ga 00000000 000OOODO mo FP C32T DIN standard rail attachment Figure 8 FP Parts and Functions Specifications and Functions of Control Unit FPS Status indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error CED and operation stats RUN green Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is being executed It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately PROG green Lights when in the PROG mode and indicates that operation has stopped It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately ERROR ALARM red Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic function Lights if a hardware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated RUN PROG mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of the PLC Switch position Operation mode RUN upward This sets the RUN mode The program is executed and operation begins PROG downward This sets the PROG mode The operation stops In this mode programming can be
108. a transmission Data table for transmission transmission buffer DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 Data table before transmission When transmission begins K8 When transmission ends KO Data is transmitted in order from the low order byte Figure 169 FP Data table for transmission transmission buffer FP gt 9 2 Overview of Communication with External Devices Sample program for data transmission This program transmits the character ABCDEFGH to external device using COM 1 port RO R10 fo DF f Data transmission command 7 The internal relay R10 is turned on at the tim R10 Ling of the transmission condition RO BD H F95ASC M ABCDEFGH DT101 f Data conversion The character ABCDEFGH is converted to an ei LASCI code and written to DT101 to DT104 _ L TrisoMTAN prao kE KIJA ma Data transmission The data in the transmission buffer is sent from Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes the COM 1 port _J are sent from the COM 1 K1 port Figure 170 FPE Sample program for data transmission The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 That data is sent from the COM 1 port using the F159 MTRN instruction Explanatory diagram The character is converted to ASCII code Data register DT Data transmission using and the data is stored
109. able of Contents T Z Table of Error GOV Ss cots deat Neils Kenda a SV aire EEE aoe 13 42 13 7 1 Table of Syntax Check Error rigs sees Pin Geet aGe wh oases 13 42 13 7 2 Table of Selt Diagnostic Error i222 etocias tetereveuernoke s 13 43 13 8 Table of Instructions 4 lt o1 ever ets wk Pavlik Aa oem ties 13 44 13 9 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 5 13 66 13 10 Hexadecimal Binary BCD w ni8 dc shea lah Meter dows boat eel wales Deed 13 67 UB Ad Pi COGS ss ot ede testi edt e a ira cone pein trie a r a teh th wt 13 68 LZ LZDIMENSIONS dei Mek coeean tie det ida covet awe iwc eee 13 69 T31L Gontrol Unitas arent ne aeles cae Sneed alerts a ea cee een oS 13 69 T3122 SE Xp nsion Unite Morte Lc tek orate es e e ee ot wlan OL 13 70 Dat E odes E E E E A l 1 Record of changes cece eect eens R 1 vii Before You Start FP Before You Start Installation environment Do not use the FP unit where it will be exposed to the following e Direct sunlight and ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 55 C 32_F to 131 F e Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 RH and sudden temperature changes causing condensation e Inflammable or corresive gas e Excessive vibration or shock e Excessive airborne dust metal particles or salts e Water or oil in any from including spray or mist e Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alka
110. acity Max 2 048 byte The communication format and baud rate transmission speed should be set to match the connected device FPE 9 6 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 9 6 __Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication This section explains about the operation of reception done flag and transmission done flag when using serial communication 9 6 1 When STX not exist is Set for Start Code and CR is Set for End Code When receiving data Relationship between the various flags Reception done flag and Transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction External received A B C CR D E F G data Cannot be stored when reception done flag is on on Reception done flag R9038 or R9043 Off D F159 MTRN en Duplex transmission instruction disabled while F159 MTRN execution off instruction is being executed Transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 off Transmitted data 1 2 3 CR Stored Y Y j Reception A A A A p Write pointer E E buffer B B B Bot F B ic C C C IG u me Number of recep lt l gt lt gt lt 3 gt lt 0 gt lt l gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt tion bytes Number of bytes received is f f Write pointer Write pointer cleared when F159 MTRN instructio
111. ails Procedure of installation method Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal method Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever Pull the attachment lever downwards Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail Figure 28 Removal method FPS 5 1 Installation Installation using the optional mounting plate When using the slim 30 type mounting plate AFP0811 Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the slim 30 type mounting plate to mounting panel and install according to the dimensions shown below gt c 10 mm 0 39 in 0 m m S a 00 g z 00 Loo e lO q m Ol c H mi AFP0811 eS 30 mm 1 18 in Lol 6 mm 0 24 in Figure 29 FP Installation optional slim 30 type mounting plate The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails Installation Removal Figure 30 FP Installation using slim 30 type mounting plate When using an expansion unit tighten the screws after joining all of the slim 30 type mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example Two expansion units 30 0 mm 1 18 in 60 0 mm 2 36
112. al speed of 500Hz a maximum speed of 5 000Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 300ms and a movement amount of 10 000 pulses X8 HDF F1 DMV H1100 DT100 F1 DMV K500 DT102 F1 DMV K5000 DT104 F1 DMV K10000 DT108 F1 DMV K300 DT106 F1 DMV KO DT10 F171 SPDH DT100 KO Figure 91 FP Program of positioning control instruction F171 When the program is run the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table Brice Control code 1 H 1100 ae Initial speed 2 500 Hz Bice Maximum speed 2 5 000 Hz Bite Acceleration deceleration time 3 300 ms Bigs Target value 4 10 000 pulses DT110 DT111 Pulse stop KO FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses 500 Hz 0 Hz With 30 steps Af 5000 500 30 steps 150 Hz Zt 300 ms 30 steps 10 ms With 60 steps Af 5000 500 60 steps 75 Hz At 300 ms 60 steps 5 ms Figure 92 FP Pulse output diagram of F171 instruction 1 Control code lt H constant gt 0 Fixed Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps Can be specified for only Ver 2 0 or later Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Operation mode and output method 0
113. alculates the number of acceleration deceleration steps in the range 0 to 60 steps If the operation result is 0 pulses are output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration The number of acceleration deceleration steps is found using the formula acceleration deceleration time ms x component initial speed Hz Example With incremental initial speed 300Hz maximum speed 5kHz acceleration deceleration time 0 5s CHO target value 1000 CH2 target value 50 300 x 1000 _ 299 626Hz CHO component initial speed i 7 10002 502 Pare 300 x 50 CH2 component initial speed 14 981 Hz i 7 10002 502 CHO number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 3 x 299 626 147 8 60 steps CH2 number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 3 x 14 981 7 4 7 steps wE Note The linear interpolation control instruction can be used with the C32T2 control unit only FPE 6 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output instruction F176 Circular interpolation The circular interpolation controls with two axes according to the specified data table This instruction calculates the component speed at each scan and corrects it while moving along the circular If the scan time is shorter than the specified frequency timing by more than 10 times the constant scan function should be used and if the scan time is longer than the specified frequency timing the
114. am memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are pro grammed using the same trigger continuously Correct the program so that the high level instructions exe cuted in every scan and at the leading edge are triggered sep arately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination operands for example the operands mustall be of a certain type Enter the correct combination of operands 13 42 13 7 Table of Error Cords User s ROM error 3 7 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Description and steps to take Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer Unit installation error The number of installed units exceed the limitations Turn off the power supply and check the restrictions on unit combinations System register error Probably an abnormality in the system register Check the system register setting Interrupt error 0 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer Interrupt error 1 An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible Turn off the power and check the noise conditions Interrupt error 2 Position of abnormal I O un
115. ar SPCH interpolation Max 20 kHz t Note The linear and circular interpolation control functions can be used with the C32T2 control unit only PWM output function specifications Built in Output contact Memory area Output frequency Related high speed number being used being used instructions counter channel no Control flag When the resolution is 1000 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz 0 0 to 99 9 FO MV When the resolution athe is 100 15 6 kHz to 41 7 kHz 0 to 99 FPS 6 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 6 2 2 Function being Used and Restrictions Channel The same channel cannot be used by more than one function Function Channel High speed counter function High speed counter being used Addition input and Subtraction input function Two phase input One input and Direc tion distinction CHO CH2 CHO CH1 Pulse output CHO N A A A funcHon CH2 A A N A A Available N A Not Available Restrictions on I O allocations The inputs and outputs allocated to the various functions listed in the table in the previous section 6 2 1 cannot be allocated to more than one function Except for the examples noted below inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs Cases in which inputs and outputs can be used as exceptions A a Example 1 If no reset input is used
116. ared and the address write pointer is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer If there are two start codes data following the later start code is overwritten and stored in the reception buffer The reception done flag R9038 or R9049 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Because of this if the F159 MTRN instruction is executed at the same time that the terminal code is received the reception done flag will not be detected Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS When sending data Relationship between the various flags Reception done flag and Transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction Transmitted data TX a b TX TX c d e ETX ry ry Transmission Transmission Transmission 9 E done flag R9039 or R9049 R IN off F159 MTRN on Duplex transmission instruction a disabled while F159 execution off MTRN instruction is being executed TT m Transmission buffer a lef a a a l c c b b b b d d p d d ma m e e e
117. arth the varistor may be shorted 24V DC 24V DC ov Varistor d Varistor Function ee V for C32T a Function 39 V 56 V for C24R2 earth earth R FP power supply line FPOexponsion unit power supply line Figure 38 Power supply line of FPE and FPO expansion unit Installation and Wiring FPS 9 3__Wiring of Input and Output This section explains input wiring and output wiring of FP 5 3 1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Relay output type O Input terminal FPS Power supply for sensor Power supply for input Figure 39 FP Relay output type sensor NPN open collector output type Sensor Power supply for input Figure 40 FPE NPN open collector output type sensor Voltage output Universal output type Sensor FPS Power supply for input Figure 41 FP Voltage output universal output type sensor Two wire output type Olnput terminal Sensor FPS Power supply for input Figure 42 FP Two wire output type sensor FPS 5 3 Wiring of Input and Output Precaution when using LED equipped lead switch When a LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED equipped lead switch make sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than 19 2 V DC In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series LED equipped lead switch Figure 43 FP Precaution when using LED equipped
118. ata co sine operation Floating point type datatang ent operation Floating point type data arc sine operation COS S 1 S D 1 D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D SIN S 1 S D 1 D Floating point type data arccosine operation COS 1 S 1 S D 1 D Floating point type data arctangent operation TAN S 1 S D 1 D Floating point type data natu ral logarithm LN S 1 S gt D 1 D Floating point type data exponent EXP S 1 S gt D 1 D 13 62 FP 13 8 Table of Instructions Floating point type data logarithm Floating point type data power LOG S 1 S D 1 D S141 1 a S2 1 S2 D 1 D Floating point type data square root 16 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion 32 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion Floating point type data to 16 bit integer conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data Floating point type data to 32 bit integer conver sion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data Floating point type data to 16 bit inte ger conversion rounding the first decimal point down to integer S 1 S D 1 D Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D Converts the 32 bit integer data
119. ations that can be performed with this instruction Counter software reset Counting operation enable disable Hardware reset enable disable Clear controls from high speed counter instructions F166 to F176 Clear target value match interrupt af amp Example Performing a software reset XT HDF FO MV H 1 DT90052 F0 MV HO DT90052 eere Figure 71 FP Program of high speed counter control instruction F 0 In the above program the reset is performed in step and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed Elapsed value change and read instruction F1 This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and DT90045 Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value A a Example 1 Changing the elapsed value X7 DF F1 DMV K3000 DT90044 Set the initial value of K3000 i 4 in the high speed counter Figure 72 FP Program 1 of elapsed value change and read instruction F1 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS A e Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X7 Read the elapsed value of th HDF F1 DMV DT90044 DT100 Bode Flapoca walle erie high speed counter and
120. ay under Online on the menu bar J me next page 12 5 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPS Procedure 2 For error code is 1 to 9 Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error For error code is 20 or higher Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool FPWIN GR in PROG mode to clear the error Using FPWIN GR Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared In the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR If the mode selector switch has been set to the RUN position the error is cleared and at the same time operation is enabled If the problem that caused the error has not been eliminated it may look in some cases as though the error has not been cleared 2 Tip curred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens click on the Operation Err button in the Status display dialog box and confirm the address at which the error occu
121. ber has been set but the station number settings are not consecutive or the station number settings are consecutive but there is a station for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PLC Link the link transmission cycle will be longer For further information please refer to page 10 22 PLC Link Response Time 10 16 FPS 10 3 Monitoring When a PLC Link is Being Used 10 3 Monitoring When a PLC Link is Being Used 10 3 1 Monitoring Using Relays When using a PLC link the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relay R9060 to R906F correspond to station No 1 to 16 If the transmission data from a different station is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target station is on before using the data Conditions ON When the PLC link is normal for on off OFF If transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PLC link is not being used Operation mode relay R9070 to R907F correspond to station No 1 to 16 The PLC operation modes RUN PROG of other stations can be ascertained for any given PLC Relay No R9070 R9071 R9072 R9073 R9074 R9075 R9076 R9077 R9078 R9079 R907A R907B R907C R907D R907E R907F Station No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off OFF When the uni
122. break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter l clockwise Wire a limit pels Wire CORRECT INCORRECT Installation and Wiring FPS 5 6 Safety Measures This section explains the safety measures momentary power failures and protection of power supply and output 5 6 1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Poweron timing differences between the PLC system and input output or mechanical power apparatus e Responce time lag when a momentary power drop occurs e Abnormality in the PLC unit external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequates safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit externally Emergency stop circuit Add an emergency stop circuit externally to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shutdown or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs Start up sequence The PLC should be
123. buffer of general serial data communication mode 0 to 32764 i Note Buffer capacity setting for data re ceived of general serial data commu nication mode 0 to 2048 The communication format when using the PLC link is fixed at the following settings the data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115 200 bps 13 20 FPS 13 5 Table of Special Internal Relays 13 5 Table of Special Internal Relays The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The on and off states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction R9000 Self diagnostic error flag Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs The content of self eS error is stored in DT90000 Not used Not used I O verification error flag Turns on when an I O verification error occurs R9005 hae battery error flag Turns on for an instant when a backup battery error occurs non hold Backup battery error flag Turns on and keeps the on state when a backup battery hold error Occurs Once a battery error has been detected this is held even after recovery has been made It goes off if the power supply is turned off or if the system is initialized Operation error flag Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs hold The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 indicates th
124. bute distributed to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at D i wo ASCII code Twelve characters of the character constants of S are conversion converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 16 bit table 1 2 S3 The data of S1 is searched for in the areas in the data search range S2 to S3 and the result is stored in DT 90037 and DT90038 32 bit table 1 2 S3 The data of S1 1 1 is searched for in the 32 bit data search data designated by S3 beginning from S2 and the result is stored in DT90037 and DT90038 13 55 Specifications FP Data shift instructions Data table shift out and compress Data table shift in and compress Right shift of n bits in a 16 bit data Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 Shifts the n bits of D to the right Left shift of n bits in a 16 bit data Right shift of n bits in a 32 bit data Left shift of n bits in a 32 bit data ifts the n bits of D to the left Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data
125. cally Data is read from and written to an external device through the data registers Figure 162 FPE General purpose Serial Communication overview Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose Serial communication function the Data transmission and Data reception functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the Reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the FP and an external device Data transmission Data to be outputis stored in the data register used as the transmission buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the COM port Data register DT Data transmission using F159 MTRN instruction Device with RS232C port Data writing The end code specified by the system register is automatically added to the data that has been sent The maximum volume of data that can be sent is 2 048 bytes FPX Figure 163 FP Data transmission Data reception Input data from the COM portis stored in the received buffer specified by the system register and the Reception done flag goes on Data can be received whenever the Reception done flag is off Data register DT pu When data is received the Reception done flag is
126. cation cassettes can be used with the PLC link function Name esernton aN Aen This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a two cae aes eee wire RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links C NET FPG COM3 p general purpose serial communication and a PLC link 10 18 FPS 10 4 Connection Example of PLC Link Setting of system register When using a PLC link the transmission format and baud rate are fixed as shown below Communication format Character Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Set the communication mode and the unit No using the system registers Setting of unit No and communication mode Setting of FP gt unit No 1 No 410 Unit No for COM 1 port 1 No 412 Communication mode for COM 1 port PC link Setting of FP gt unit No 2 Unit No for COM 1 port 2 Communication mode for COM 1 port PC link Setting of FP unit No 3 Unit No for COM 1 port 3 Communication mode for COM 1 port PC link A Tip Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the PLC link function j N P 10 19 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP Allocation of link area Link relay allocation FPZ FPZ FP Unit No 1 Unit No 2 Unit No 3 WLO No 1 WEO Transmitted am Received area area 19 19 No 2 20 q Transmitted n 30 area 40 No 3 Qa Ga Received area 63 Re
127. ccessfully The response will contain a communication error code so confirm the content of the error e The unit number and command name will be the same for a command and its corresponding response as shown in the figure below This makes the correspondence between the command and the response clear y Same 4 gt Same SF s _ Figure 146 FP Command amp response message note Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS 8 1 4 Types of Commands that Can Be Used Read contact area Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Write contact area Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Reads the contents of a data area WD Writes data to a data area RS Reads the value set for a timer counter WS Writes a timer counter setting value Read timer counter elapsed value area RK Write timer counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Register or Reset data monitored G Monitors a registered contact or data using the code MD or MC SC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off pattern SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range RR Reads the contents of a system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register
128. ceived area Transmitted area Received area Figure 217 FP Link relay allocation when using a PLC link with three FP units 63 System register Name Set value of various control unit No 1 Range of link relay used for PLC link 64 Starting no for link relay transmission 0 Link relay transmission size 20 Link register allocation FPZ FPS FP Unit No 1 Unit No 2 Unit No 3 LDO No 1 LP Transmitted ammm Received arca amm area 39 39 No 2 Transmitted i a area 80 No 3 lt Received area 127 Received area Transmitted area Received area Figure 218 FP Link register allocation when using a PLC link with three FP units 127 System register Name Set value of various control unit Range of link register used for PLC link Starting no for link register transmission Link register transmission size Setting the largest station number Name Set value of various control unit No 1 No 2 No 3 10 20 FPS 10 4 Connection Example of PLC Link Connection diagram FPS FPS FPS Unit No 1 Unit No 2 Unit No 3 The final unit terminal station should The final unit terminal station should be shorted between the transmission be shorted between the transmission line and the E terminal line and the E terminal Figure 219 FPE Connection diagram when using a PLC link with three FP units 10 4 2 Sample Programs Prog
129. comparative condition 1252 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition Sls S2 13 49 Specifications FPS Symbol Description Steps 32 bit data STD Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bi comparison data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 Start S241 2 STD lt gt i ic operation by comparing two 32 bi omparative condition S1 1 S1 STD gt i ic operation by comparing two 32 bit omparative condition S1 1 S1 gt STD gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bi data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 2 STD lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 2 STD lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bi data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 S2 1 2 32 bit data AND Connects a contact serially by comparing two comparison 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 AND 1 S2 1 S2 AND lt gt Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 41 1 S2 41 S2 AND gt Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 2
130. ction instructions F118 UP DOWN counter F119 Left right shift register LRSR Data rotation instructions 16 bit data right rotation Counts up or down from the value preset in S and stores the elapsed value in D Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area between D1 and D2 as the register Rotate the n bits in data of D to the right 16 bit data left rotation Rotate the n bits in data of D to the left 16 bit data right rotation with carry flag data 16 bit data left rotation with carry flag data Rotate the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R9009 data to the right Rotate the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R 9009 data to the left 32 bit data right rotation Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right 32 bit data left rotation Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left 32 bit data right rotation with carry flag data 32 bit data left rotation with carry flag data Bit manipulation inst 16 bit data bit set F131 16 bit data bit reset F132 16 bit data bit invert ructions Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the righ
131. duty is KO to K999 0 0 to 99 9 If the control code is K20 to K24 the duty is KO to K990 0 to 99 Values are specified in units of 1 K10 digits below the decimal point are rounded off ia Note If a value outside the specified range is written for the duty area while the instruction is being executed the frequency that is output will be uncorrected Written data is not corrected however High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Communication Cassette Communication Functions of FP asua 7 3 Communication Cassettes os aaau 7 6 Attachment of Communication Cassette 7 10 Wiring of Communication Cassette 7 11 Communication Cassette FP FPS 7 1 Communication Functions of FP 7 1 Communication Functions of FP gt This section explains about the communication functions of the optional communication cassette 7 1 1 Functions of Communication Cassette There are three types of communication functions made possible by the FP communication cassette as described below Computer link The computer link is used to carry out communication with a computer connected to the PLC thathas a transmission right Instructions Command messages are output to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the received instructions A MEWNET exclusive protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the co
132. e Unit No of destination 01 to 32 Decimal Text Content is specified based on type of command Check code BCC Hexadecimal fi e End code ENEDESE COGS ENCORE Two One digit digit p that reads the value internal relay R1 DP item specifies that only 1 point should be read Command name e g Read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command Figure 142 FPE Command message format Start code Header Commands must always have a ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C at the beginning of a message Unit No The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command should be specified When using 1 1 communication 01 should be specified 3 Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted in all upper case characters gs the fixed formula for that particular command 1 RC Specification and L name data to be written Command code ASCII code H23 Figure 143 FPE Command message text Check code This is the BCC block check code used to detect errors using horizontal parity It should be created so thatit targets all of the text data from the start code to the last text character The BCC starts from the start code and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is c
133. e 16 bit data Exchange the data between D1 and D2 with the block data specified by D3 exchange 13 51 Specifications FPS Binary arithmetic instructions 16 bit data S D D S D 5 addition F21 32 bit data D s D D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D 7 addition 16 bit data addition Destination setting 32 bit data addition Destination setting 16 bit data subtraction 32 bit data subtraction 16 bit data subtraction Destination setting 32 bit data S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D S D D S D 5 S D D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D 7 i N N subtraction Destination setting 16 bit data multiplication F31 32 bit data multiplication 16 bit data division 32 bit data D S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient D 1 D division remainder DT90016 DT90015 16 bit data fi S1 x S2 D multiplication resultin one word 16 bit data D 1 gt D increment 32 bit data D 1 D 1 D 1 D increment 16 bit data D 1 D decrement 32 bit data D 1 D 1 D 1 D decrement 32 bit data S141 S1 x S2 1 2 gt D 1 D multiplication result in two words 1 2 D_ S1 x S2 D D 1 2 D_ S141 1 x S241 2 D 3 D 2 D 1 D S1 S2 D S1 S2 quotient D remainder DT90015 D D W
134. e 1 second i yo TX 0 K1094 Goyoaneum aeee Figure 227 FPE Sample program of clock calendar function The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits in the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time Chapter 12 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 12 1 Self Diagnostic Function 0 12 3 12 2 Troubleshooting csecut cs ein betey eee be Pete iets 12 5 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPS 12 2 FPS 12 1 Self Diagnostic Function 12 1 Self Diagnostic Function This section explains about the self diagnostic function of FP 12 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition Status indicator LEDs on control unit Description Operation status ERROR ALARM Normal sa on Normal operation Operation condition Light on PROG mode Stop Flashes Flashes Forcing on off in Run Operation mode Abnormal Flashes When a self diagnostic Operation condition error occurs Light on Flashes When a Self diagnostic Stop error occurs Varies Varies Light on System watchdog timer has been activated The control unit has a self diagnostic function which X0 7 X8 F i ifi i i Status oo identifies errors a
135. e is added automatically When STX exist is specified for the header start code in system register 413 or 414 do not add the header start code to the transmission data The header start code is added automatically When using the 1 channel RS 232C type communication cassette transmission does not take place until CS Clear to Send turns on If you are not going to connect to the other device connect to RS Request to Send The maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048 Contact numbers in parentheses indicate COM 2 port contacts Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS 9 2 2 Receiving Data from External Device Overview of data reception Data register DT Data receiving E Device with RS232C port Reception done flag on Figure 175 FP Data reception Data input from the COM portis stored in the received buffer specified by the system register and the Reception done flag goes on If the Reception done flag is off data can be received at any time Sample program for data reception Data 10 byte received in the received buffer through the COM 1 portis read to DTO R9038 Bel DF gt L Reception done detection B The internal relay R10 is turned on at the R10 reception done contact R9038 timing _ f F10 BKMV DT201 DT204 _DT0 _ Retrieving received data fl The received data in the r
136. e 2 channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a two wire RS 485 port It supports 1 N computer links C NET general purpose serialcommunication and a PLC link FPS Communication cassette 1 channel RS485 type FPG COM3 AFPG803 FP gt 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations This section contains restrictions on unit combinations 13 1 Restrictions on the Number of Expansion Units for FPO expansion unit oo o o 15 1 a O OI Wes 2 i 2 H AA Ae sl 48 Bd ad ol Bed ad i al si al eo oO i i oolffools 8 ao i o off a o iie o fif 58 a GEAN CE O sollfooly 7 GESI CE 7S I ba E D ao ao r H HIH Ace B B eo f az f ro Gz rol Gz p ey 0o0o0000 00000000 paged sage kasak F o odo o o Io o o o ol lesen el con paged a o Godo ooo paged Soo Sisan i o _Gooooooo c ntods dodo nfoBoda dodo oto o n tooo ool ool Maximum possible expansion is with a total of three units FP E Ca2T Control unit Unit 1 for expansion Unit 2 for expansion Unit 3 for expansion Figure 6 Restriction on unit combinat
137. e data between the computer and PLC The communication speed and transmission format are specified using system registers No 413 COM 1 port and No 414 COM 2 port Program for computer link To use a computer link a program should be created that enables command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side No communication program is required on the PLC side Programs for the computer side should be written in BASIC or C language based on the MEWTOCOL COM format MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS 8 1 2 Explanation of Operation when Using a Computer Link Command and Response Instructions pertaining to the PLC are called commands These should be issued by the computer to the PLC Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a response back to the computer The computer uses the response to confirm the results of the command being executed MEWTOCOL COM sketch Communication is carried out in a conversational format based on the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedures Data is sent in ASCII format The computer has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and PLC each time a message is sent
138. e first operation error which occurred Operation error flag Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs The address non hold where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs R9009 Carry flag This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed R900A gt flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the comparison instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison instructions when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the comparison instructions Auxiliary timer instruction flag Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in the timing operation of the F137 STMR F 183 DSTM auxiliary timer instruction The this flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Tool port communication error Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred Constant scan error flag Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34 13 21 Specifications FP Relay No Name Description R9010 Always on relay Always on Always off relay Al
139. e no Stations that have not been added to a 2 unitlink the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pcm 23 32 64 x4 407 Tpc Tt amp x Pcm 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation example 6 When there are no Stations that have not been added to a 2 unitlink the largeststation number is 2 32 relays and register 2 words have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pcm 23 1 1 x4 31 Tpc Tt x Pcm 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 1 2 976 3 976 ms TIt 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms me next page 10 23 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP i Notes e In the description stations that have not been added refers to stations that are not connected between the No 1 station and the largest station number or stations that are connected but for which the power supply has not been turned on e When calculation examples 2 and 3 are compared the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not been added to the link and as a resul
140. eceived buffer is read from the area in which itis stored from DT201 _and sent to DTO The contents of the four words from DT201 to DT204 are written to data registers DTO to DT4 R10 _FI59MTRN DT100 KO Starting from DT100 the contents of 0 bytes are sent from the COM 1 K1 port Figure 176 FPE Sample program for data reception k Preparing to receive the next data To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the reception done contact R9038 _ based on the empty data The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 Data is received from the RS232C device to the received buffer 2 The reception done contact R 9038 R9048 is turned on 3 The received data is sent from the received buffer to the area starting with the data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction based on the empty data is executed which resets the buffer writing point and turns off the reception done contact R9038 R9048 The system is then ready to receive the next data FP gt 9 2 Overview of Communication with External Devices Explanatory diagram Data register DT O ma Data reading Data receiving lt j Reception done R9038 on Reception ready R9038 off Device with RS232 port Figure 177 FP Data reception explanatory diagram Data table for reception received buffer
141. ed R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 MSG instruction is executed Not used Not used Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay and timer counter contacts Interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction Interrupt error flag R902C Not used Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902D Not used R902E Not used fRooar Notwsee 13 23 Specifications FP Relay No Name Description Not used COM 1 port communication mode flag This is on when the general purpose communication function is being used It goes off when the MEWTOCOL COM or the PLC link function is being used Printinstruction execution flag Off Printing is not executed On Execution is in progress Run overwrite complete flag This is the special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following completion of a rewrite during the RUN operation Not used Not used COM 1 port communication error flag COM 1 port reception done flag during general purpose communicating COM 1 port transmission done flag during general purpose communicating High speed counter control flag This goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication This goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction Turns on when the end code is recei
142. ed and the ERROR ALARM LED flashes 6500 0 ms 10 to 81900 ms Normal scan 0 Normal scan 0 to 350 ms Scans once each specified time interval Enabled 0 Normal scan 0 to 350 ms Scans once each specified time interval Range of link relays used for PLC link 0 0 to 64 words R ange of link data registers used for 0 0 to 128 words PLC link 0 0 to 63 0 0 to 64 words 0 0 to 127 Link data register transmission size 0 to 127 words i 0 Maximum unit number setting for 16 1 to 16 13 16 FPS 13 4 Table of System Registers Default Descriptions value High speed counter operation mode CHO Do not setinput X0 as high speed settings X0 to X2 Do not set in counter put X0 as 2 phase input X0 X1 high speed 2 phase input X0 X1 Reset counter input X2 Addition input X0 Addition input X0 Reset input X2 Subtraction input X0 Subtraction input X0 Reset input X2 One input X0 X1 One input X0 X1 Resetinput X2 Direction decision X0 X1 Direction decision X0 X1 Reset input X2 CH1 Do not set input X1 as high Do not set in speed counter put X1 as Addition input X1 high speed Addition input X1 Reset counter input X2 Subtraction input X1 Subtraction input X1 Reset in put X2 High speed counter operation mode CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed settings X3 to X5 Do not set in counter put X3 as 2 phase input X3 X4 hig
143. ed and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data CHO 16 points CH2 16 points CH4 16 points CH6 16 points CH1 16 points CH3 16 points CH5 16 points CH7 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F WX4 X40 to X4F WX6 X60 to X6F WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F WX7 X70 to X7F I O Allocation FPS 4 1 6 1 0 Number of FPO I O Link Unit for right side expansion The I O allocation of FPO I O link unit FPO IOL is determined by the installation location Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output 32 points Y 20 to Y3F Y 40 to Y5F Y60 to Y 7F a i EX b Tip I O number of FP and FPO Specifying X and Y numbers On the FP and the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output Example The same number X20 and Y 20 can be used for input and output Expression of numbers for input output relays Since input relay X and output relay Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below X Decimal i eee rete Hexadecimal 1 2 3 9 A B F Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 Installation and Wiring Installation ie pseeca dred iigan reei ni aeae 5 3 Wiring of Power Supply osasia 5 9 Wiring of Input and Output cece eee 5 12 Wiring of MIL Connector Type e cee eee eee 5 17 W
144. ed here fo 34 FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function Positioning path Y axis CH2 2000 mm M 1 2 3 4 5000 X axis CHO Control code H constant Stars 4 Hj jj js iii 0 Fixed L Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 0 Fixed Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 03 Incremental PLS SIGN forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 13 Absolute PLS SIGN forward on reverse off Composite speed Initial speed Maximum speed Hz lt K constant gt 1 5Hz to 100kHz K1 to K100000 However 1 5Hz is for an angle of Odeg or 90deg only Also specify K1 when specifying 1 5 Hz If the component speed drops lower than the minimum speed for each frequency range then the speed will become the corrected component speed so be careful See 6 When simultaneously using a high speed counter periodical interrupt or PLC link do not set to 60kHz or higher If initial speed is set equal to maximum speed pulses will be output with no acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration time ms K constant KO to K32767 If this is 0 pulses will be output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration Target value K 8388608 to K8388607 When operating only one axis a In incremental mode
145. ed input voltage is 24 VDC and the temperature is 25 C 70 F Specifications and Functions of Control Unit FPS Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the temperature C32T C24R 16 at24V DC 16 at24 V DC Number of at26 4V DC Number of J at 26 4 V DC points per 12 points per 12 common common which are si which are si 9 multaneous multaneous 7 on on 46 52 55 46 48 55 107 8 118 6 124 107 8 118 4124 Ambient temperature C F Ambient temperature C F Figure 11 FP Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Internal circuit diagram X0 X1 X3 X4 Figure 12 FP Internal circuit diagram Input 1 X2 X5 to XF Xn Internal circuit y COM For X2 and X5 to X7 R1 5 6 KQ R2 1kQ For X8 to XF R1 6 8 kQ R2 820 Q Figure 13 FP Internal circuit diagram Input 2 FPS 2 2 Input and Output Specifications 2 2 2 Output Spec ifications Transistor output specifications for C32T and C32T2 ee a Insulation method Optical coupler Output type Open collector NPN Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Operating load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Max load current For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 For Y2 Y5 to YF Max surge current For Y0 Y1 Y3 Y4 A A A For Y2 Y5 to YF
146. ee Ve Vcc ig cag she p SO RS ee ec ee ihap ay se peat s us lo o DEL 13 68 FP gt 13 12 Dimensions 13 12 Dimensions 13 12 1 Control Unit FPG C32T FPG C32T2 30 0 1 181 18 0 709 60 0 2 362 om 6 mM Tt 1N Q le Q 0 a Q m 3 5 0 138 nh canta g it i wn unit mm in S FPG C24R2 30 0 1 181 10 03 60 0 2 362 a Qoo000000 _ooo000000 90 0 3 543 goo0ga0a00 SSYYYYNGGGJ SSSSVGVVG9g 3 5 0 138 4 5 0 177 unit mm in 13 69 Specifications FPS 13 12 2 Expansion Unit FPG XY64D2T 30 0 1 181 18 0 709 60 0 2 362 Oooo00000 _oooo0000 90 0 3 543 o D D D D D D o D D D m m 4 5 0 177
147. ek after the alarm is issued but in some cases the problem is not detected immediately The battery should be replaced as soon as possible without turning off the power supply e When replacing the battery connect the new battery within 20 seconds of removing the old one Chapter 6 High speed Counter and Pulse Output 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Functions Overview of Each Functions 0 00s 6 3 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 6 5 High speed Counter Function 005 6 10 Pulse Output Function af dsa0 s oad aa 6 20 PWM Output Function aoaaa 6 56 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS FPS 6 1 Overview of Each Functions 6 1 Overview of Each Functions This section explains about the functions that use built in high speed counter of FP 6 1 1 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed Counter Functions that use built in high speed counter There are three functions available when using the high speed counter built into the FPS High speed counter function Encoder output is input to the high speed counter FP The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the Roller Motor Encoder desired output Inverter START STOP signal Cutter Cutter blade control signal Tape lead wire Figure 58
148. en a calculation error has occured Turn off the check box for No 26 When operation is resumed it will be continued but will be handled as an error 12 4 FPS 12 2 Troubleshooting 12 2 Troubles hooting This section explains about what to do if an error occurs 12 2 1 If the ERROR ALARM LED Flashes Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents error code using the programming tool FPWIN GR Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR Ver 2 ifa PLC error occurs during programming or debugging the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status display dialog box If the error is an operation error esac henge ne ae the error address can be con Praca Fie n L zA y a as ee a KI firmed in this dialog box a ae ee Click on the Clear Error but U Cosuserd Site ime Hea 10 P ton to clear the error Block Command L Raa fam L Fran Sie S00F fisa sa F PLL Twos FF Banii iK iin Figen oe if Tom Tame 1 Dee Comchor bite maz bani D5 mee Fiha REMOTE PROG Hia Drest PLL Eram Flag PLE Bowe Flag E 21 W sO FAIH Mode 0 OUT Reem 0 Wot De Bb Temir 0 TEST Mode 1 CTEF AUK lt 0 WA Enon i Het n Je Mode 1 kese Aros ri t E 1 irek Enable T Hemmi 1 iem kma EsternalE Ee any Friii M Erm Cak 61 aration Erres Occurred S d Tip To display the status display dialog box select Status Displ
149. eration ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program There is no need to setsystem registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers Hold non hold type setting System registers 5 to 8 10 12 and 14 The values for the timer and counter can be specified by using system register no 5 to specify the first number of the counter System registers no 6 to no 8 no 10 no 12 and no 14 are used to specify the area to be held when a battery is used Operation mode setting on error System registers 4 20 23 and 26 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur Time settings System registers 31 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time MEWNET WO PLC link settings System registers 40 to 45 and 47 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET WO PLC link communication Note that the default value setting is no PLC link communication Input settings System register 400 to 403 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used as a exclusive input Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 419 Set these registers when the tool port COM 1 and COM 2 ports are to be used for computer link general communicatio
150. ere DT90049 DT90051 Max 30 kHz x2 channel tion CH2 R903C DT90200 DT90202 Using to to three channels DT90201 DT90203 Max 20 kHz x3 channel CH3 DT90204 DT90206 Using to to four channels DT90205 DT90207 Max 20 kHz x4 channel Specify 2 phase CHO DT90044 DT90046 25us Using the input to to one channel desired One in DT90045 DT90047 Max 20 kHz output put x1 channel from Direc et Y0 to Y7 tion dis DT90200 DT90202 sing a to to two channels Pao Ut DT90201 DT90203 Max 15 kHz instruc x2 channel tion j Notes Related instruc tions FO MV F1 DMV F166 HC1S F167 HC1R 1 Reset input X2 can be set to either CHO or CH1 Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3 2 For information on min input pulse width see page 6 12 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Pulse output function specifications Built in Input output contact number being used Memory area being used Maximum high output speed ccw Control frequency counter Pulse or sign flag channel output output DT90052 R903A DT90044 DT90046 Using FO MV lt bit4 gt to to one channel DT90045 DT90047 Max 100 kHz x1 channel Using two channels Max 60 kHz PLSH DT90052 R903C DT90200 DT90202 x2 channel F174 lt bit4 gt to to Using linear SPOH DT90201 DT90203 interpolation F175 Max 100 kHz Seley Using circul
151. erminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply 12 8 FPS 12 2 Troubleshooting Check of input condition 4 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool If the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer If the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again referring the following Check for the duplicated use of output and for the output using the high level instruction Check the program flow when a control instruction such as Master control relay or J ump is used 12 9 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPS 12 2 5 Ifa Protect Error Message Appears When a Password Function is Used Procedure Enter a password in the Set PLC Password menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the Access radio button Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar 2 The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed Turn on the radio button next to Access enter a password and click on the Settings button Set PLC Password dialog box Seting Operation Mode eae F Pree C Unprotect __ Heo Password Figure 231 FPWIN GR Set PLC Password dialog box 12 2 6 Ifthe Program Mode doe
152. es 13 46 FP 13 8 Table of Instructions Loop LOOP Bina The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S Label LBL P E o R ag The operation of program is ended Indicates the D end of a main program Conditional CNDE The operation of program is ended when the trig a EJECT Eee Adds page break for use when printing 13 47 Specifications FPS Step ladder instructions Start step SSTP ER The start of program n for process control n Start the specified process n and clear the pro M ner cess currently operated Scan execution type sist Start the specified process n and clear the pro n cess currently operated Pulse execution type Clear step icste n Resets the currently operated process n Step end STPE End of step ladder area STE 4 Clear multi SCLR Resets the currently operated processes n1 to ple steps m HESCLR n1 n2 n2 Subroutine instructions Subroutine Executes the specified subroutine When return call H call nH ing to the main program outputs in the subrou tine program are maintained Subroutine entry Subroutine Ends the subroutine program return L eis a Indicates the start of the subroutine program n Interrupt instructions Interrupt Indicates the start of the interrupt program n Interr
153. essage 3 Message 4 Message 5 Operation auxiliary register for search instruction F96 SRC Operation auxiliary register for search instruction F96 SRC The contents of the specified message are stored in these special data registers when F149 MSG instruction is executed The number of data that match the searched data is stored here when F96 SRC instruction is executed The position of the first matching data is stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is executed DT90039 DT90040 DT90041 Not used Potentiometer volume input VO Potentiometer volume input V1 The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the program to read this value to a data register V0 DT90040 V1 DT90041 DT90042 Used by the system DT90043 Used by the system 13 30 FP 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers DT90044 DT90045 DT90046 DT90047 High speed counter elapsed value High speed counter target value A Available N A Not available Address Name Description Reading Writing The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 32 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have
154. et em posero O Number of pin Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Model MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 Product number 1840434 Suitable wires Sizes Nominal cross sectional area 0 3 mm2 AWG 24 to 16 0 2 to 1 25 mm2 Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models are marketed by Phoenix Contact Manufacturer Cross sectional Size Part No area mm2 Phoenix Contact Co AWG 24 Al 0 25 6YE AWG 20 Al 0 5 6WH AWG 18 Al 0 75 6GY AWG 18 Al1 6RD AWG 20 for 2 pcs Al TWIN 2 x0 5 8WH Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Part No CRIMPFOX UD6 Product number 12 04 436 When tightening the terminals of the terminal block use a screwdriver P hoenix Contact Co ProductNo 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less FP 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type Wiring method Procedure j Notes Remove a portion of the wire s insulation 7 mm 0 276 in Suitable wire Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Clockwise When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may
155. ffer must be specified In the default setting the entire data register area is specified for use as the received buffer To change the data register area used as the received buffer specify the starting area using system register No 416 No 418 for the COM 2 port and the volume number of words using No 417 No 419 for the COM 2 port The received buffer layout is as shown below Reception buffer Starting area specified by The number of No 416 No 418 received bytes is stored here The number of words is specified using No 417 No 419 Received data The system register number in storage area parentheses indicates the number for the COM 2 port Figure 167 FPE Reception buffer Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS 9 2 Overview of Communication with External Devices This section explains about the communication data transmission and data reception with external devices n Communication with external device is handled through the data register 9 2 1 Data Transmission to External Device Overview of data transmission Data writing Data register DT Data transmission using L i F159 MTRN instruction Received data Device with RS232C port Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the transmission buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the COM port Figure 168 FP Overview of dat
156. ged since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous exe cution 13 65 Specifications FP 13 9 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Read contact area Write contact area Read data area Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units RD Reads the contents of a data area Write data area Writes data to a data area Read timer counter set value area Reads the value set for a timer counter Write timer counter set value area Writes a timer counter setting value Read timer counter elapsed value area Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed value area Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored Registers the data to be monitored Monitoring start Monitors a registered contact or data using the code MC or MD Preset contact area fill command Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 pointon and off pattern Preset data area fill command Writes the same contents to the data area of a
157. gram relative value positioning operation direction Program X8 R903A R12 RIO T Ain eh HF Positioning operation running a OUNO ie ay R10 RIA TS a a a HoF 1H Positioning operation start R11 Positioning data table DT102 DT104 M d 5 000 H F1omv 5000 T104 Acceleration time 200 msec F1DMmV K200 DT106 arget value Movement amount 10 000 pulses F1Dmv K10000 DT108 se FIDMV KO Tuo Control code H11 00 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW F171 SPDH DT10 KO f Pikse output instruction tabie shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used and The data table headed by DT100 Leues are ouput hom che L Pulses are output from CHO R903A R10 TO Role p ts a ea Ve E ee HoF Positioning done pulse 1 second o R12 EE eee re E TMA Op ALO 0 1 s type timer Figure 107 FPE Sample program relative value positioning operation program 6 44 FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output diagram 5 000 Hz 10 000 pulses 500 Hz QHZ i 1 _ _e lt _S 200 ms 200 ms Figure 108 FP Sample program pulse output diagram High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Relative value positioning operation minus direction When X9 turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y 1 of specified channel CHO 0V 24V DC Pulse output CW Pulse output
158. h speed 2 phase input X3 X4 Reset counter input X5 Addition input X3 Addition input X3 Reset input X5 Subtraction input X3 Subtraction input X3 Reset input X5 One input X3 X4 One input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Direction decision X3 X4 Direction decision X3 X4 Reset input X5 CH3 Do not set input X4 as high Do not set in speed counter put X4 as Addition input X4 high speed Addition input X4 Reset counter input X5 Subtraction input X4 Subtraction input X4 Reset in put X5 13 17 Specifications FPS Default Descriptions value Pulse catch input settings Not set XOX1 X2 X3 X4 X5X6 X7 Specify the input contacts used as pulse catch input Interrupt input settings Not set XOX1 X2 X3 X4 X5X6X7 Specify the input contacts used as interrupt input X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5X6 X7 Specify the effective interruptedge When set on off is valid i Notes e Ifthe operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction decision the setting for CH1 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CH3 is invalid in system register 401 e If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH1 takes precedence in system register 400 and the setting of CH3 takes precedence in system register 401 e The settings for system register 402 and 403 are specified on the screen for each contact e If system register 400 to 403 have been set
159. h speed counter may be used 13 7 Specifications FPS Serial communication specifications 1 1 communication Note 1 fem Description Communication method Half duplex transmission Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line RS232C Transmission distance 15 m 49 21 ft Transmission speed 2 400 bits s to 115 2k bits s Note 2 Baud rate Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Parity none even odd Data length 7 bits 8 bits Note 2 Conforming to RS232C connected via the terminal block j Notes 1 In order to use the serial communication function 1 1 communication RS232C type communication cassette is required 2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers Serial communication specifications 1 N communication Note 1 fem Bese Communication method Two wire half duplex transmission Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance Maximum 1 200 m 3 937 ft Notes 4 and 5 Total distance Transmission speed 2 400 bits s to 115 2k bits s Baud rate 19 200 bits s when a C NET adapter is connected Notes 2 4 and 5 Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Parity none even odd Data length 7 bits 8 bits Notes 2 Number of units stations Maximum 99 units
160. he comparative condition S1 gt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bi data in the comparative condition SE S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bi data in the comparative condition S1 lt 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition SE S2 16 bit data Connects a contact serially by comparing two comparison 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S 2 AND gt z Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1lz S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S 2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 1252 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1s 2 16 bit data Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two comparison 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S 2 OR z Connects a contact in parallel by compari 16 bit data in the comparative condition Sl S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 gt S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the
161. he control unit power supply connector If ex pansion units or intelligent units are added the current is in creased by the value indicated below 90 mA or 90 mA or Expansion unit current consumption This is the cur rent consumed from the expan sion unit power supply connector If a unit is not listed below it means that it has no power supply connector Approx 85 g 3 00 oz Input circuit current consumption This is the cur rent consumed by the input cir cuits of the vari ous units This value indicates the current that flows into the in put circuit n in dicates the num ber of points that are on Output circuit current consumption This is the cur rent consumed by the output cir cuits of the vari ous units This value indicates the current used to drive the out put circuits n indicates the number of points that are on This value does not in clude the load current value i O 77 2 mA or less 70 mA or less FP expan sion unit FPG C24R2 FPG XY64D2T 160 mA or less 35 mA or 77 2 mA or less 70 mA or less 77 2 mA or less 3 5xnmA or 15 mA or less FPO expan FP0 E8X 10 mA or 4 3 xn mA or sion unit FPO E8R 15 mA or 50 mA or less 4 3 xn mA or FPO E8YR 10 mA or 100 mA or less FPO E8YT 15 mA or 3xnmA orless FP0 E16X 20 mA or 4 3 xnmA or FPO E16R 20 mA or 100 mA or les
162. he unit targeted for communication Computer Lip Li 8 7 fj Commercially Pe H available 7 HA conversion adapter RS232C 2e2 amp RS485 A unit number is used to identify the destination to which a command is being sent The PLC thatsends a response can be identified by the unit number Figure 157 FPX Computer link setting of unit No station No Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS Unit No setting using unit No station No setting switch The unit number setting switch is located inside the cover on the left side of the FP control unit The selector switch and the dial can be used in combination to set a unit number between 1 and 31 Unit No station No setting switch Selector Dial switch switch Figure 158 FPE Computer link unit No station No setting switch Relationship between unit No setting switch and unit numbers Dial switch position Selector switch on The range of numbers that can be set using the unit No setting switch is from 1 to 31 Setting the unit No setting Switch to 0 makes the system register setting valid so thata unit number between 1 and 99 can be set FPS 8 3 Computer Link 1 N communication Setting using the system register The unitnumber is specified using the unit number set
163. hen an error condition is detected in an intelligent unit the bit corresponding to the unit No will be set on 1 Monitor using binary display 15 11 7 321 0 UnitNo on 1 error off 0 normal 3 2 1 0 BitNo E DT90008 Not used DT90009 Communication error flag for COM2 Stores the error contents when using COM 2 port DT90010 Position of I O verify error unit for FPO right side expansion When the state of installation of FP 0 expan sion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the unit No will be set on 1 Monitor using binary display 15 11 7 3 2 1 0 BitNo 210 Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal DT90011 Position of I O verify error unit for FP left side expansion When the state of installation of FP ex pansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the unit No will be set on 1 Monitor using binary display 15 11 7 3 2 1 0 Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal 3 2 1 0 Bit No DT90012 Not used 13 28 FP 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers Name Description DT90014 DT90015 DT90016 Operation auxiliary regis ter for data shift instruc tion Operation auxiliary regis ter for division instruction A Available N A Not available One shift out hexadecimal digit is
164. his section explains about the I O allocation of FP FP expansion unit side lt lt Control unit gt FPO expansion unit side XO 7 XS F 0 a X0 oF 0 x F ol ol ol ol oo F oF oF o g g g BL cr ih Hl ai be ol Sh GE h Bi hhe sg UE e e E ee e E oe E HH E 5 B Beye HE I Be e e fiS fe Bfe I e e eB ol ol of H e H ag GEA a jfo o B oll B B H H RAPAIRE nE Falla ae es ae EE ae gai ama f laa Wa La Ue La WA Bl Bl B ro Fo Fo ro moa Yo VoF T YAE oz YF Yoz wF g B g al E s e hE 5l 5 Show MATI lt SIA LA es ee rH eB o oj os a a 50 00 oo sOljjoo oo sOljjoo oo 80 B B F zie Ea Ea ea EAEE bas EEEE bias TERIER i eo o o p ER a 8 Sfi o 0 o o 8 B1 o 0 loo le Bii o o io o oo D DI o o 25 oo oo B o oo 8B oo oo a ci amp B B Ba F A S A Sa E ET oo DI D Ole 23 28 2g oo E a g aS i 7B Az rB rB HH 5 o 3 w Fourth Third Second First First Second Third expansion expansion expansion expansion expansion expansion expansion Max possible expansion is
165. icator LED AA i Output 5 x Load 3 T 2a Load 5 3 Ks _ power supply IGUE 3 M 5to24V DC g 6 oan _L External power supply T 24V DC Phase fault protection circuit Figure 16 FP Internal circuit diagram output 2 FPS 2 2 Input and Output Specifications Relay output specifications for C24R2 2G RE Output type la 1 Form A Normally open Rated control capacity 2A 250 V AC 2A 20 V DC 4 5A per common or later Output points per common 8 points common Response time off on Approx 10 ms on off Approx 8 ms Mechanical lifetime Min 20 000 000 operations Electrical lifetime Min 100 000 operations Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature C24R Number of 8 points per at24V DC AA at26 4 V DC simultaneous 4 on 46 48 55 107 8118 4 124 Ambient temperature C F Internal circuit diagram C24R z 5 U T g E Specifications and Functions of Control Unit FPS 2 3 Terminal Layout Diagram 2 3 1 Control Unit for C32T and C32T2 Input i Note Output ooo yt em ea y YE Canna 4
166. ide If an error occurs 01 00j j Cp is returned as the response OOis the error code and j j is the BCC we 9 28 FP 9 4 Data Transmitted and Received with the FP 9 4 Data Transmitted and Received with the FP gt The following four points should be kept in mind when accessing data in the FP transmission and received buffers Data in the transmission and received buffers that is being sent and received is in ASCII code If the transmission format settings indicate that a start code will be used the code STX H02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data being sent Anend code is automatically added to the end of the data being sent There is no end code on the data stored in the received buffer When sending data Data written to the transmission buffer will be sent just as itis A a Example When the data 12345 is transmitted as an ASCII code to a device with RS232C port Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion of ASCII code 12345 Data to be transmitted ib Conversion of ASCII code H 31 32 33 34 35 Coded data 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 193 FPE Conversion of ASCII code If DT100 is being used as the transmission buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the upper byte and lower byte DT103 DT
167. in the high speed counter function X2 and X5 are allocated as normal inputs A Y Example 2 If no output is used to clear the differential counter in the pulse output function Y2 and Y5 are allocated as normal outputs Restrictions on the execution of related instructions F166 to F176 When any of the instructions related to the high speed counter F166 to F176 are executed the control flag special internal relay R903A to R903D corresponding to the used channel turns on Please be aware that the control flag is in progress may change while a scan is being carried out To prevent this an internal relay should be substituted at the beginning of the program When the flag for a channel turns on another instruction cannot be executed using that same channel High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Restrictions for maximum counting speed and pulse output frequency The counting speed when using the high speed counter function will differ depending on the counting mode as shown in the table on page 6 5 AN a Example 1 While in the decremental input mode and using the two channels CHO and CH1 CHO and CH1 can be used up to 30 kHz a Example 2 While in the two phase input mode and using the two channels CHO and CH2 CHO and CH2 can be used up to 15 kHz The maximum output frequency when using the pulse output function will differ depending on the number of channel being used as shown in the table on
168. ion 9 5 Features 1 3 Flat type mounting plate 5 8 FPsigma control unit 1 6 Index G General specifications 13 3 General purpose serial communication 7 4 9 3 Grounding 5 11 5 22 H High level instructions 13 51 High speed counter 13 7 High speed counter control instruction FO 6 13 High speed counter function 6 3 6 10 High speed counter function specifica tions 6 5 Home return 6 23 Home return operation 6 50 Home return operation modes 6 28 I O allocation 4 3 6 12 6 22 I O no allocation 13 10 Incremental lt relative value control gt 6 23 Inductive loads 5 15 Input modes 6 10 Input specifications 2 7 Input wiring 5 12 Installation 5 3 Installation environment 5 3 Installation method 5 6 Installation space 5 5 Instructions 13 44 Interlock circuit 5 22 Internal circuit diagram 2 8 2 10 2 11 J J OG operation 6 23 6 54 L LED equipped lead switch 5 13 LED equipped limit switch 5 14 Lifetime of backup battery 5 26 link area 10 13 Link area allocation 10 10 M Memory areas 13 12 Min input pulse width 6 12 Momentary power failures 5 23 O One input mode 6 11 Operation on error 12 4 Optional mounting plate 5 7 Output specifications 2 9 Output wiring 5 15 P Password function 12 10 Performance specifications 13 5 Photoelectric
169. ion running _ BeOS Se re ee ea ee R50 RLS crete Ne ae ht AB ee ee ae DF Positioning operation start _ R51 Positioning data table DT202 DT204 i Fi DMV K 1000 DT 204 7 DT205 Maximum speed 1 000 Hz praos Acceleration time 100 msec FIDMV K100 DT206 D207 DT209 Deviation counter clear output Not used FipMv Ko DT208 Control code H1120 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CW F171 SPDH_DT 200 ko H Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses are output from CHO B5 The data table headed by DT200 is used Pulses are output from CHO R903A R50 TO R525 i paaa ned a a DF H Positioning done pulse 1 s R52 SS SS SS SS SS TMX 0 K10 0 15 type timer Aa aa n ee hl ee ee a ee a ee DF Eo MV H10 DT 90052 Near home deceleration start _ Fo mv HO DT 90052 Figure 119 FPX Sample program home return operation program Pulse output diagram Proximity sensor Home sensor XA on X3 on X2 on 1 000 Hz 120 Hz 0 Hz 100 ms 100 ms Figure 120 FPE Sample program home return operation pulse output diagram High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS J OG operation plus direction While X8 is in the on state a pulse is output from CW output Y 0 of specified channel CHO Program XB Data table F1 DMV K 300 DT 302 Frequency speed 300 Hz Control code H11 10 Duty 1 4 25 J
170. ions Up to three expansion units can be added at the right of the FP these expansion units being either expansion units or intelligent units from the earlier FPO series or a combination of the two There are no restrictions on the type and the order in which expansion units are installed A combination of relay output types and transistor output types is also possible Controllable I O Points Number of I O points when using Number of I O points when using FPG C32T FPG C32T2 FPG C24R2 24 points Max 120 points 32 points Max 128 points Functions and Restrictions of the Unit FP 1 3 2 Restrictions on the Number of Units for Expansion for FP expansion unit gt 8 ea 48 5 B Boll g B He e a 7 B 5 D o H H 2B EHE we or ve a 3 oa D Os joo C 50 B B ali i g 3 5r a B B Ses z Expansion unit 4 Expansion unit 3 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 1 Control unit Loo f Max possible expansion is with a total of four units Up to four dedicated FP expansion units can be added at the left of the F P The 64 points type expansion unit consist of 32 input points a
171. ions of Control Unit 21 Parts and FUNCIONS ocsi eeentei etek rede eel die take e Og 2 3 2 1 1 Parts and Functions 154 24 eeterictees tee ke Lek te o6 2 3 2 1 2 JOOP Oreo DeCMCAWON lt s24 cany Pactodantsea name tenuate 2 6 2 1 3 Communication Cassette ravers awe Reve eeen as 2 6 2 2 Inputdnd Output Specifications ssvcisv eres eee at ate ee ee 2 7 2 2 1 Input Specifications t cec ik cex Oo esnee Gd whet Ok Dieters wees 2 7 2 2 2 Output Specifications 2225204 sh ba ee eee keer cea etaedes 2 9 2 3 Terminal Layout Diagram a cceeseoe creed oe ide dae ee Sage ba dee es 2 12 2 3 1 Control Unit for C32T and C3202 csusss ciavecadnieeuren ts 2 12 2 3 2 Control Unit for C24R2 cccoueed cel atin bet Aves Gee DE kn ty 2 12 Chapter3 Expansion 3 1 Type of Expansion Unit shes cts nee ieee wade ew Sewn eed 3 3 Table of Contents FPS 3 2 Expansion Method of Units for FPO and FPZ 00005 3 4 3 3 Expansion Method of FP Expansion Unit 00005 3 5 3 4 Specifications of FPE Expansion Unit uuaa 3 6 3 4 1 FP Expansion VO Unit ccc 3 6 Chapter 4 I O Allocation 4T OAc siener e EE E wind SS EREN VEEN 4 3 4 1 1 I O Number of FP Control Unit ouaaa 4 3 4 1 2 1 0 Number of FP Expansion Unit for left side expansion 4 4 4 1 3 I O Number of FPO Expansion Unit for right side expansion 4 5 4 1 4 1 0 Number of FPO Analog I O Unit for right side expansion 4 5 4 1 5 1 0 Number of FPO A D Conversion Uni
172. iring of Terminal Block Type 00005 5 20 Safety Measures vcicii es vows bedded sie ew veks A 5 22 Backup Battery 4 cc4 ecu tend eee eka cose ete ie 5 24 Installation and Wiring FPS FP 5 1 Installation 5 1 Installation This section explains installation environment and installation method of FP X 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space Avoid installing the unit in the following locations Ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 RH Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gases Excessive airborne dust metal particles or salts Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Excessive vibration or shock Direct sunlight Water or oil in any form including spray or mist Measures regarding noise Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges If noise occurs in the power supply line even after the above countermeasures are taken itis recommended to supply power through an insulation transformer noise filter or like Installation and Wiring FPS Measures regarding heat discharge Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in
173. is split Figure 214 Unallowable allocation example 1 Allocations in which the transmitted and received areas are split into multiple segments Figure 215 Unallowable allocation example 2 10 15 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP gt 10 2 4 Setting the Largest Station Number for a PLC Link The largest station number can be set using system register no 47 Sample settings No of units linked Setting contents When linked with 2 units 1st unit station no 1 is set 2nd unit station no 2 is set A largest station no of 2 is set for each When linked with 4 units 1st unit station no 1 is set 2nd unit station no 2 is set 3rd unit station no 3 is set 4th unit station no 4 is set A largest station no of 4 is set for each When linked with n units Nth unit station no n is set A largest station no of N is set for each j Notes e Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing station number the transmission time will be that much longer e If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no 47 e The same value should be set for the largest station numbers of all of the PLCs that are linked e If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest station number has not been set default 16 or the largest station num
174. is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor be gins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R903A R103 R100 DF R100 R100 R101 HoF Hl R101 inm Ko DT 90044 _ FI67HCIR KO K5000 YO Sets high speed counter CHO When elapsed value reaches 5 000 Y0 goes off R101 YO S Y1 S R100 F61 DCMP K 4500 DT 90044 H R100 R900C R102 R102 Y1 H DF JR R903A R100 TO R103 TMX 0 K5 Resets elapsed value of high speed counter CHO p counter CHO reaches 5 000 pulses J Gattis merer operator signal CSatteinvener high speed ioral L 32 bit data comparison instruction Y Figure 83 FP High speed counter function sample program 2 program High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Function This section explains about the pulse output function of F P 6 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and controls The pulse output function enables positioning control by use in combination with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver Provides trapezoidal table shaped control with the exclusive instruction F171 SPDH for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed maximum speed acceleration deceleration time and target value The
175. it eal I O status error Stops An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred Check the number of the interrupt program and change it to agree with the interrupt request An abnormal unit is installed Replace the unit with a new one An abnormality in an I O unitis occurred Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and locate the abnormal FP expansion I O unit Then check the unit Intelligent unit error An abnormality in an intelligent unit Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit 1 0 unit verify error Selectable The connection condition of I O unit has changed compared to that at time of power up Check the contents of special data register FPO expansion I O unit DT90010 FP expansion I O unit DT90011 and locate the erroneous I O unit Set the operation status using system register 23 to continue operation Operation error Selectable Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed The causes of calculation errors vary depending on the instruction Set the operation status using system register 26 to continue operation Battery error Selectable The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the ba
176. k calendar function 11 2 1 Area for Clock Calendar Function If a backup battery is installed in the FP the clock calendar function can be used With the clock calendar function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs Special data DT90053 Hour data Minute data i Not available H00 to H23 HOO to H59 DT90054 Minute data Second data i ilab HOO to H59 HOO to H59 DT90055 Day data Hour data i ilab H01 to H31 H0O to H23 DT90056 Year data Month data i ilab HOO to H99 HO1 to H12 DT90057 Day of the weekdata Avai ilab H0O to H06 11 2 2 Setting of Clock Calendar Function There are two ways to set the clock calendar function as described below Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Press the CTRL and F2 keys atthe same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Date and Time under Tool on the menu bar The above steps display the Set PLC Date and PIG Home Time dialog box shown atthe left Input the date Chama by mki and time and click on the OK button Time bhima fobs i Figure 225 FPWIN GR Set PLC Date and Time dialog box 11 4 FPS 11 2 Clock Calendar Function Setting and changing using program 1 The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which
177. ks in parallel Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this instruction Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction DF Leading Turns on the contact for only one scan when the edge pF leading edge of the trigger is detected differential Trailing Turns on the contact for only one scan when the edge 0F trailing edge of the trigger is detected differential wE Note ARS Alternative YRL Inverts the output condition on off each time the out lt a leading edge of the trigger is detected DF When T256 C 256 or higher R9000 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses 13 44 FP 13 8 Table of Instructions Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan Leading edge differ ential initial execution type Set Output is set to and held at on Reset Output is set to and held at off Keep Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on No opera tion No operation 13 45 Specifications FP Name Boolean Symbol Basic function instructions Auxiliary timer 16 bit Auxiliary timer 32 bit F183 DSTM Y R L H_F137 STMR S DH Y
178. lead switch Precaution when using two wire type sensor If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Two wire j Bleeder type sensor i resistor Figure 44 FP Precaution when using two wire type sensor The off voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value of bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 V The input impedance is 5 6 KQ I Sensor s leakage current mA 13 44 istori R lt ke The resistance R of the bleeder resistoris R 6x 24 ko The formula is based on an input impedance of 5 6 kQ The input impedance varies depend ing on the input terminal number The wattage W of the resistor is W P ower supply voltage R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W Installation and Wiring FPS Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch If the input of PLC does not turn off because of the leakage current from the LED equipped limit switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below LED Bleeder equipped resistor limit switch Power supply for input r Internal resistor of limit switch kQ Figure 45 FP Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch The off
179. lector switch Dial switch Ore ets Sao Figure 206 FPX Unit No setting switch Relationship between unit number setting switch and unit numbers e The range of numbers that can be set using penta a sa S SIRE the unit No setting switch is from 1 to 16 switchi omi Eswitensoni Setting the unit No setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid Not available 10 8 FP 10 2 Communication Parameter Settings j Notes To make the unit number setting in the FPWIN GR valid set the unit No setting switch to 0 If the station number setting switch has been set to 0 the system register settings and SYS1 instruction setting become valid When using the PLC link function set the range of unit numbers as 1 to 16 Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing station number the transmission time will be that much longer If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no 47 Station numbers can also be set using the SYS1 instruction The priority order for station number settings is the station number setting switch gt system registers gt SYS1 instruction 10 9 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP 10 2 3 A
180. line solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda e Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Static electricity e Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity e In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Cleaning e Do not use thinner based cleaners because they deform the unit case and fade the colors Power supplies e Aninsulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed e If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse viii FPS Before You Start Power supply sequence e Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the control unit turns off before the power supply for input and output e If the power supply for input and output is turned off before the power supply of the control unit the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below e When
181. link General purpose serial communication PLC link Computer link Computer link General purpose General purpose serial Communication serial communication Computer link General purpose serial communication j Notes e Communication using MEWTOCOL COM is possible with ports and tool ports for which Computer link is noted above With MEWTOCOL COM the same commands are supported on all three channels and frames of up to 2 048 bytes header lt are supported e General purpose serial communication is possible only with the COM 1 port and COM 2 port Communication Cassette FP gt 7 2 3 Communication Specifications of Communication Cassette Serial communication specifications 1 1 communication Note 1 Communication method Half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line RS232C Transmission distance Total length 15m 49 21 ft Transmission speed Baud rate 2 400 bits s to 115 2 k bits s Note 2 Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit P arity None Even Odd Data length Character bits 7 bit 8 bit Note 2 Conforming to RS232C Connection using terminal block Transmission data format i Notes 1 The RS232C type of communication cassette is necessary in order to use the serial communication function 1 1 communication 2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers Serial commu
182. link unit station No 6 or 14 PLC link unit station No 7 or 15 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90248 DT90249 DT90250 DT90251 PLC link unit station No 8 or 16 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as A N A shown below DT90252 to DT90255 DT90256 Not used Unit No Station No switch monitor for COM port Used by the system Example A N A When DT90219 is 0 Higher byte Lower byte DT90240 to T T DT90243 L L Unit Station No 6 Setting contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 Setting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 N A N A 13 41 Specifications FP 13 7 Table of Error Cords This section contains the syntax check error and self diagnostic error for the FP 13 7 1 Table of Syntax Check Error Error code Operation status Description and steps to take El Syntax error Stops A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Duplicated outpu
183. llocation of Link Relay and Link Register Link area allocation The PLC link function is a function that involves all of the PLCs that have been booted in the MEWNET W0 mode To use the PLC link function a link area needs to be allocated Set the allocations for both the link relays and link registers Link area allocations are specified using system registers System registers Name Set value Range of link relay used for PLC link 0 to 64 words Range of link register used for PLC link 0 to 128 words Starting no for link relay transmission 0 to 63 Link relay transmission size 0 to 64 words Starting no for link register transmission 0 to 127 Link register transmission size 0 to 127 words Relation of system register set value to link area Link relay A 0 Received area No 42 Starting no for link relay lt q transmission No 40 Range of link relay Transmitted area No 43 Link relay transmission size used for PLC link Received area y Not used area Max 64 for PLC link word Figure 207 FP Link relay allocation Link register T EE Received area No 44 Starting no for link q register transmission No 41 Range of link iccj register used for Transmitted area No 45 Link register transmission size PLC link Received area y Not used area Max 128 for PLC link word Figure 208 FP Link register allocation 10 10 FPS 10 2 Communication
184. minals and power supply terminal Min 100Q measured resistance function earth with a 500 V DC megger Between input terminal and output terminal Between input terminals X0 to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and power supply terminal function earth Between output terminals and power supply terminal func tion earth Between input terminals X0 to X7 and input terminals X8 to XF Between input terminals X0 to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and output terminals Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75 mm 0 030 in 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98 m s2 or more 4 times on 3 axes Noise immunity 1 000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 us based on in house measurements Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust 13 3 Specifications FPS Weight Unit type Part No Weight FP control unit FPG C32T C32T2 Approx 120 g 4 24 oz FPG C24R2 Approx 140 g 4 94 oz FP expansion unit FPG XY 64D2T Approx 100 g 3 53 oz FPG E8X Approx 65 g 2 29 oz FPG E8R E8YR Approx 90 g 3 17 oz FPG E8YT E8YP Approx 65 g 2 29 oz FPG E16R Approx 105 g 3 70 oz FPO expansion unit FPG E16T E16P E 16X E16Y T E 16Y P Approx 70 g 2 47 oz FPG E32T E32P Unit s current consumption table Type of unit FP con trol unit FPG C32T FPG C32T2 Control unit current consumption This is the cur rent consumed from t
185. mputer and PLC Two communication methods are available 1 1 and 1 N A network using the 1 N connection is called a C NET The PLC sends back responses automatically in reply to commands from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer FP Command message E Response message Figure 127 FPE Computer link function Applicable communication cassette For 1 1 communication 1 channel RS232C type Part No FPG COM1 2 channel RS232C type Part No FPG COM2 For 1 N communication 1 channel RS485 type Part No FPG COM3 Communication Cassette FP General purpose serial communication General purpose serial communication enables data to be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP while reading and writing of data from an external device connected to the COM port is handled through the FP data registers Image processing device Data register DT Data transmission using ON F159 MTRN instruction a O POOOooo E Do Data received in reception buffer o O Received data Data is sent to and received from external devices through the data registers FPS Fig
186. munication FPS Communication format setting for Micro Ilmagechecker To set the communication mode and transmission format settings for the Micro Imagechecker select 5 Communication under 5 ENVIRONMENT on the main menu and set the following items mn 7 Serial communication setting for Micro Imagechecker To enter settings relating to serial communication for the Micro Imagechecker select 53 Serial Output under 5 Communication on 5 ENVIRONMENT of the main menu and set the following items Serial Output Invalid Digit Read End Process End Numerical Calculation Output Output Tip If Del is specified for the invalid processing parameter zero suppression processing will be carried out on the output data and the output format will be changed Always make sure Repl 0 is specified When outputting data to an external device numerical calculation is required so Out should be specified for the Numerical calculation parameter When the above settings are specified data with the contents shown below will be output from the Micro lmagechecker 1012345 CR L Terminator End code Results of numerical calculation No 1 J udgment output No 2 O NG J udgment output No 1 1 OK FPS 9 3 Connection Example with External Devices Connection example with Micro Imagechecker A200 A100 e When using the 1 channel RS232C type of com
187. munication cassette Micro Imagechecker side FP side 5 pin RD ReceivedData_ RD Request to Send RS cs cieartoSena_ cs bet cs Figure 182 FPE Connection example with micro imagechecker 1 e When using the 2 channel RS232C type of communication cassette Micro Ilmagecheckerside FP side 5 pin R1 Received Data RD A R2 ReceivedData2 RD To other device Figure 183 FPE Connection example with micro imagechecker 2 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS Procedure of communication In the following example the Micro Ilmagechecker is connected to the COM 1 port Micro Imagechecker 7 HEr asc m ancrzenersss oro J Cow Ho wJ HEren ono e ki J Ladder program Data register RS232C port Start command S CR is setin transmission buffer _____ _p gt Data transmission with F159 MTRN i A R9039 off and R9038 off 9 Reception buffer writing point reset og Start command S Cp transmission o Pe Transmission done flag R9039 on Transmission Scan result 1012345 p is received EE Reception done flag R9038 on Data read 1012345Cp Empty data transmission with F159 MTRN o R 9039 off and R9038 off of Reception buffer writing point reset Reception O 14 5 O 7 10 Figure 184 FP Procedure of comm
188. n 6 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method CW CCW output method aa Forward e Reverse Eg vo ANN ecw puse via UUU L L Direction of increas Direction of decreas ing elapsed value ing elapsed value This is a method in which control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse Figure 84 FP Pulse output function CW CCW output method Pulse Sign output method Forward off Reverse on Forward 1 Reverse e Pulse Pulse J O LF LE LE LAL FUEL U L Rotation Yl om cs direction Sign Direction of increas Direction of decreas ing elapsed value ing elapsed value This is a method in which control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and on off signals to specify the direction of rotatin In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction Sign signal is off Figure 85 FP Pulse output function Pulse sign output method 1 Pulse Sign output method Forward on Reverse off e Forward a Reverse Pulse Pulsel o FLF LALA LAL ALULLE Rotation ee ee eee direction Sign L Direction of increas Direction of decreas ing elapsed value ing elapsed value This is a method in which control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and on off signals to specify the direction of rotatin In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction
189. n PLC link and modem communication Note that the default value setting is Computer link mode Checking and changing the set value of system register 1 Setthe control unit in the PROG mode 2 Select PLC Configuration under Option on the menu bar 3 When the function for which settings are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings click on the OK button 13 14 FPS 13 4 Table of System Registers Precautions for system register setting Sytem register settings are effective from the time they are set However MEWNET W0O PLC link settings input settings tool and COM ports communication settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized 13 15 Specifications FP 13 4 2 Table of System Registers Name Starting number setting for counter Hold type area starting number setting for timer and counter x o d type area starti
190. n Be Used 8 8 8 1 5 Setting the Communication Parameters when Using a Computer Link stink fete bi tat eal Men Maude att Maelo dae ades 8 10 8 1 6 REStTICHON ois een eee bene geben pea a ye el en EE 8 10 8 2 Connection Example with External Device aaua 8 11 8 2 1 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with computer cece ee eee 8 11 8 2 2 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with programmable display GT10 GT30 8 14 8 3 Computer Link 1 N communication cece eee eee 8 18 8 3 1 Overview of 1 N Communication ccc cee eee 8 18 8 3 2 Communication Cassette Used for 1 N Communication 8 18 8 3 3 Settings of System Register and Unit NO cece eee 8 19 8 3 4 Connection with External Device wo cece 8 22 Chapter9 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 9 1 General purpose Serial Communication cece eee 9 3 9 1 1 Overview of Function 2 ico525 22h fitness tocs oo Gan ee eed dad 9 3 9 1 2 Program of General purpose Serial Communication 9 5 9 1 3 Communication Parameter Settings when Using General purpose Serial Communications 9 6 9 2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 9 8 9 2 1 Data Transmission to External Device 00005 9 8 9 2 2 Receiving Data from External Device 0005 9 12 FP Table of Content
191. n format for COM 2 port Character bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM 2 port 19200 bps The communication format and baud rate transmission speed should be set to match the connected programmable display Communication format setting for GT10 GT30 When the GT10 GT30 is shipped from the factory the communication format for GT10 GT30 settings are as shown below GT Configuration settings should be changed to match the application at hand fem Description Data Tengi Stop bit 1 bit fixed Payee foa me next page 8 15 Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS Communication condition settings are specified using the parameter settings for the programmable display and the GT Configuration item in the GTWIN screen creation tool For detailed information please see the technical manual for the GT10 GT30 GTWIN GT Configuration settings Communication Parameters screen Gc ihg Commotion Ponari Posteri tartar Garman Gaag Hobe PLE Tarina iska of TOE Porthcorrencienl ta PIETAS Drie Ead Fate hz 7 tp Fe borman bra Dea lah fi i Fair J m Imer n m Sme f Ga Qiepler ra Gies Pes Lho Parii a a TO Pai icd to TA Bee Ree i bee Thowh Fusctor ibaga Foe Glas Bite rs rmm ee PP ores crip ic the mied ore Figure 152 GTW
192. n is executed Figure 197 FP Flag operation when receiving data STX not exit and CR setting Half duplex transmission method should be used for general purpose serial communication Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on me next page 9 33 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer returns to the initial address in the reception buffer When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the error flag R9037 or R9047 reception done flag R9038 or R9048 and transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 go off Duplex transmission is disabled while the F159 MTRN instruction is being executed Check the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 Reception stops if the error flag R9037 or R9047 goes on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction and turns off the error flag i Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress Example If the reception completed flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To avoid this an internal relay should be substituted at the beginning of the program FP 9 6 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 9 6 2 When STX is Se
193. nce should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the input output power supplies If the input output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation Be sure to supply power to a control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both FPS 5 2 Wiring of Power Supply 5 2 2 Groundin Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression For grounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100 Q The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unitas possible The ground wire should be as short as possible If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device CORRECT INCORRECT Other device Other device FPX Inverter etc FPX Inverter etc Z Figure 37 FP Grounding i Note Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Example Since the power supply line of the FPE power supply connector is connected to the function earth through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and e
194. nd 32 transistor output points Controllable I O Points Number of 1 0 points when using Number of I O points when using FPG C32T2 32 BR points o OEY Max 288 Max 288 points FPG C24R2 S points Max eee points The FP expansion unit cannot be used for FPG C32T as Tip If using FP 0 expansion units and FP expansion units in combination the number of input and output points can be expanded to a maximum of 384 points for the FPG C32T2 and 376 points for the FPG C24R2 FPS 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 Programming Tools This section explains about the programming tools for FP 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programmin Programming Programming tool software tool software The tool software can also be used with the FP series m The FPWIN Pro Ver 4 or FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows software is used with the FP The earlier FP WIN GR Ver 1x NPST GR and FP Pro grammer cannot be used Computer PC connection cable PC connection cable FPX This cable needed for connection between the FP and the computer Figure 7 Programming tools 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 OS Operating Hard disk Product English language FPWINGRF EN2 AFPS10520 FPWIN GR Ver 2 software Windows 95 98 English language Upgrade to Me 2000 NT 30MB or more me
195. nd stops operation if necessary rector FEE Ae l When an error occurs the status of the status indicator GES Ea INESSE LEDs on the control unit vary as shown in the table fae above SH ial Figure 228 FP Status indicator LED 12 3 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPS 12 1 2 Operation on Error Normally when an error occurs the operation stops The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped when a duplicated output error or operation error occurs by setting the system registers You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below PLC Configuration setting menu on programming tool software FPWIN GR To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs select PLC Configuration under Option on the menu bar and click on the Action on Error tab The screen shown below is displayed Hich Speed Counter nteruct Input Tool Fort GOWI Fort COME Port HekiMen heoll Hakl Ker feil 2 Action on Eroe Tima Link fF Moc d Stop en an LO vsisi senor occu FP HoE Shop whin an option anon occurs M Mod Alans Bsiap Emr Figure 229 FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting screen Af A amp Example 1 Allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No 20 When operation is resumed it will not be handled as an error A a i a Example 2 When continuing operation ev
196. ng number setting internal relays xls o s d type area starting number setting data registers Ss ot Qo d or non hold setting for step der process d type area starting number for C link relays x o d type area starting number for PLC link registers Disable or enable setting for dupli cated output Operation setting when an I O verification error occurs Operation setting when an operation error occurs Alarm Battery Error Operating setting when battery error occurs Wait time setting for multi frame com munication Constant value settings for scan time m Starting number for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size Starting number for link data register transmission N MEWNET WO PLC link ay eee E ut ToO Default value 1008 1008 0 to 1024 Sin case of using back up battery 0 to 1024 option the setting value will be effective Sin case of not using back up battery option please keep the default value Otherwise we can t guarantee the function of hold non hold value 90 32710 0 to 32765 Non hold Hold Non hold 6 0 to 64 4 128 0 to 128 Disabled Disabled E nabled Stop Stop C ontinuation of operation Stop Stop C ontinuation of operation Disabled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is notis sued and the ERROR ALARM LED does not flash When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is issu
197. nication 5 An optional communication cassette RS485 type is required in order to use 1 N communication 6 An optional communication cassette RS485 type is required If a communication cassette is installed and communication is being carried out re send processing is recommended 7 The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration 13 6 FP 13 1 Table of Specifications High speed counter pulse output and PWM output specifications Ea A ser le ee High speed counter Input point number When using single phase Four channels maximum When using 2 phase Two channels maximum Maximum counting speed When using single phase for 1 channel 50 kHz max x1 ch for 2 channels 30 kHz max x2 ch for 3 or 4 channels 20 kHz max x3 to 4ch When using single phase Addition input Subtraction input Input mode Input When using single phase contact used X0 count input ch0 Note1 X1 count input ch1 X2 reset input chO ch1 When using 2 phase for 1 channel 20 kHz max x1 ch for 2 channels 15 kHz max x2 ch When using 2 phase Two phase input One input Direction distinction input When using 2 phase X0 X1 count input chO X3 X4 count input ch2 X2 reset input ch0 X3 count input ch2 X4 count input ch3 X5 reset input ch2 ch3 Two independent points simultaneous output possible
198. nication specifications 1 N communication Note 1 ae aS eee ee Communication method Two wire half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance Total length Max 1 200 m 3 937 ft Notes 4 and 5 2 400 bits s to 115 2 k bits s 19 200 bits s when a C NET adapter is connected Notes 2 4 and 5 Transmission speed Baud rate nor Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Parity None Even Odd Data length Character bits 7 bit 8 bit Note 2 Max 99 units stations Number of units stations 32 units stations max when a C NET adapter is connected Notes 3 4 and 5 Conforming to RS485 Connection using terminal block t Notes 1 The RS485 type of communication cassette is necessary in order to use the serial communication function 1 N communication FPS 7 2 Communication Cassette 2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers 3 Unit Station numbers are specified using the system registers Up to 31 units stations can be specified using the switches on the control unit 4 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS 485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units stations transmission distance and transmission speed baud rate vary depending on the connected device
199. nput is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the specified bit of special data register DT90052 Up to two driver systems can be connected When using CHO When using CH2 FP gt FP gt Home input x2 Home input X5 Near home X3 Near home X6 input paver input Driver Pulse output yo Pulse output Y3 put Y4 a t Directional Directional switching switching output output X3 or other desired input can X6 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input be specified for the near home input Figure 89 FP Pulse output function Figure 90 FP Pulse output function I O allocation when using CHO I O allocation when using CH2 single pulse input single pulse input FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function 6 4 4 Control Mode Incremental lt relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected mode PLS and SIGN PLS and SIGN Forward off Reverse on Forward on Reverse off Elapsed value of high speed counter Pulse output Pulse output when direction Pulse output when direction from CW output is off output is on Addition Positive Pulse output Pulse output when direction Pulse output when direction Negative from CCW outputis on output is off Subtraction Absolute lt absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the c
200. ns the type of unit used with the FPE and about the optional communication cassette 1 2 1 FPS Control Unit Name Number oft0 points PartNo Producto Input 16 points Transistor output 16 points FPG C32T AFPG2543 FPX Control unit Input 16 points Transistor output 16 points FPG C32T2 AFPG2643 Input 16 points R elay output 8 points FPG C24R2 AFPG2423 1 2 2 FP gt Expansion Unit Name Number of10 points PartNo Product No FP expansion I O unit Input 32 points Transistor output 32 points FPG XY64D2T AFPG3467 The FP expansion I O unit can be used for FPG C32T2 and FPG C24R2 FP control units 1 2 3 Units for FPO and FP gt The FP can be used the FPO series expansion I O unit power supply unit and intelligent unit 1 2 4 Communication Cassette A detachable communication cassette optional should be used when using the various functions such as the computer link serial data communication and PLC link functions E This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with aed RE aie a five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer RS232C type links and general purpose serial communication RS P CS control is possible FPG COM1 AFPG801 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPS Communication FPG COM2 AFPG802 cassett
201. nstruction to set the elapsed value A a Example 1 Writing the elasped value X7 Set the initial value of K3000 in the H DF F1 Dmv K3000 DT90044 J high speed counter Figure 103 FP Program 1 of elapsed value write and read instruction F1 A Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X8 Reads the elapsed value of the H DF F1 DMV DT90044 DT100 high speed counter to DT100 and DT101 Figure 104 FP Program 2 of elapsed value write and read instruction F1 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS fo l Tip The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193 High speed counter control flag area of FP 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 a Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 Near home input 0 off 1 on High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes j ki P For information on the special data register for high speed counter function and pulse output function see pages 6 5 and 6 6 6 42 FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Function 6 4 6 Sample Program for Positioning Control Wiring example FPE Input termina Home sensor X2
202. nu upgrade from _ Ver 4 0 or later FPWINGRR EN2 AFPS10520R Ver 1 1 Conforms to IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 4 OS Operating Hard disk Product English FPWIN Pro Ver 4 Full type for all type FP series PLC language FPWINPROF EN4 AFPS50540 Windows 95 98 Me 2000 NT 100MB of menu FPWIN Pro Ver 4 Small type English Yer 4 0 or later for FPO FP FP1 and language FPWINPROS EN4 AFPS51540 FP M menu Functions and Restrictions of the Unit FP Type of computer and suitable cable Type of computer Cable specification IBM PC AT or Part No AFC8503 D Sub 9 pin female Mini DIN 5 pin male its compatible machine Part No AFC8513 D Sub 25 pin male Mini DIN 5 pin male Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit 2 1 Parts and Functions lt 2 8h ee cewek een ee ees id 2 3 2 2 Inputand Output Specifications 00 2 7 2 3 Terminal Layout Diagram saaa 2 12 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit FPS FP 2 1 Parts and Functions 2 1 Parts and Functions This section explains about the parts and functions of FP control unit 2 1 1 Parts and Functions FPG C32T FPG C32T2 FPG C24R2 X07 XF mo y T 4 2 I I I I mo 2 2 0g0 0 arll ooon o I gooocoo0 oooooUOO 3 8 NAIS ea7e
203. o 31 Step process DT90062 Step ladder pro cess 32 to 47 DT90063 Step ladder pro cess 48 to 63 DT90064 Step ladder pro cess 64 to 79 DT90065 DT90066 DT90067 DT90068 DT90069 DT90070 DT90071 Step ladder pro cess 80 to 95 Step ladder pro cess 96 to 111 Step ladder pro cess 112 to 127 Step ladder pro cess 128 to 143 Step ladder pro cess 144 to 159 Step ladder pro cess 160 to 175 Step ladder pro cess 176 to 191 DT90072 Step ladder pro cess 192 to 207 DT90073 Step ladder pro cess 208 to 223 DT90074 Step ladder pro cess 224 to 239 DT90075 Step ladder pro cess 240 to 255 DT90076 Step ladder pro cess 256 to 271 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the proccess starts up the bit corresponding to the process number turns on 1 Monitor using binary display Example 15 11 7 3 ee 15 11 7 3 1 Executing 0 N 0 Bit No DT90060 0 Process No ot executing A programming tool software can be used to write data 13 34 FP 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers Address DT90077 DT90078 DT90079 DT90080 DT90081 DT90082 DT90083 DT90084 DT90085 DT90086 DT90087 DT90088 DT90089 DT90090 DT90091 DT90092 DT90093 Step ladder pro cess 272 to 287 Step ladder pro cess
204. o X7F The I O allocation of FPO I O link unit FPO IOL is determined by the installation location Input 32 points First expansion Second expansion Third expansion X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output 32 points Y 20 to Y 3F Y 40 to Y 5F Y 60 to Y7F 13 11 Specifications FP 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants External inputrelay Note 1 X Number of points and range of memory area avail able for use FPG C32T FPG C24R2 FPG C32T2 512 points 1 184 points X0 to X31F X0 to X73F Turn on or off based on external input External output relay Note 1 Y 512 points 1 184 points YO to Y31F YO to Y 73F Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay Note 2 Link relay Note 2 Timer Note 2 R Counter Note 2 Special internal relay R 1 568 points RO to R97F Relay which turns on or off only within program 1 024 points LO to L63F This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link 1 024 points This goes on when the timer reaches TO to T1007 C 1008 to C1023 Note 3 the specified time It corresponds to the timer number This goes on when the timer increments It corresponds to the timer number 176 points R9000 to R910F Relay which turns on or off based on specific conditions and is used as a flag External inputrelay Note 1 WX 74 words WX0 to WX73 32 words WX0
205. o a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on FPO mounting plate slim 30 type Part No AFP0811 3 6 FP 3 4 Specifications of FPE Expansion Unit Input specifications en eK as Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current Approx 3 5 mA Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Input impedance Approx 6 8 kQ Transistor output specifications fem Beserpton Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC Max Surge current 0 5A Off state leakage current 100 uA or less On state voltage drop 0 5 V or less Response time off on 0 2 ms or less on off 0 5 ms or less External power Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC supply for driving internal circuit Current 15 mA or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Phase fault protection Thermal protection Expansion FPX Limitations on number of simultaneous on points Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature
206. o supply power to the unit AFP0581 E Green g lt gt Function earth N gt OA l Blue 0 V J SR Power supply cable Figure 35 FP Wiring of power supply Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable Part No AFP0581 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Brown 24V DC Blue OV Green Function earth Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power Supply cable Power supply type To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit The regulator on the unit is a non insulated type If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit always make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse Power supply voltage Rated voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4V DC Installation and Wiring FPS Wiring system Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit input output devices and mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker T gt Mechanical gt power OT gt apparatus Input Output devices a a Control unit Insulated DC power supply Figure 36 FP Power supply wiring system Measures regarding power supply sequence start up sequence The power supply seque
207. ode Terminator CR CR LF None Start code Header STX not exist STX exist 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data communication mode 0 to 32764 i Note Buffer capacity setting for data received of general serial data communication mode 0 to 2048 The communication format when using the PLC link is fixed at the following settings the data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115 200 bps 13 19 Specifications FP Unit No setting Default value 1 to 99 Communication mode setting Computer link Computer link General communication Selection of modem connection Communication format setting Disabled Character bit 8 bits Parity check with odd Stop bit 1 bit Enabled Disabled Enter the settings for the various items Character bit 7bits 8bits Parity chk none with odd with even Stop bit 1bit 2bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General com munication End code Terminator CR CR LF None Start code Header STX not exist STX exist Communication speed Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received
208. oh LAR del Le ce Cout 0l 2 2 4 ole eee ane n ool Figure 62 FP High speed counter function addition input mode Subtraction input mode on sa KEF CE LF ep keee F a fd LI i Count n n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 E 3 2 1 0 o Figure 63 FP High speed counter function subtraction input mode FP 6 3 High speed Counter Function Two phase input mode Phase difference input mode Incremental input CW Figure 64 FP High speed counter function two phase input mode One input mode Addition and subtraction input mode l on x FLUO FULL o on a FTF ULUL fl o Count 0 1 2 3 14 3 2 SL 22 3 4 3 Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing ss Figure 65 FP High speed counter function One input mode Direction distinction mode off l on X1 es FL off Count 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 Increasing Decreasing Sn cal Figure 66 FP High speed counter function direction distinction mode High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 3 3 Min Input Pulse Width The minimum input pulse width indicated below is necessary for the period T 1 frequency Single phase Two phase T T e pe a ag al 2 2 TEE 4444 Figure 67 FP High speed coun
209. omparison S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on 16 bit data band S1 S2 S3 S1 gt S3 gt R900A on comparison S2 s S1 S3 R900B on S1 lt S2 R900C on 13 53 Specifications Block data BCMP S1 S2 S3 Compares the two blocks beginning with S2 and S3 7 comparison to see if they are equal 32 bit data band comparison Logic operation instructions 16 bit data OR WOR S141 1 gt S3 1 S3 R900A on S2 1 2 s S1 1 S1 lt S3 1 S3 gt R9OOB on S141 1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on S1 a S2 gt D S1 v S2 gt D 16 bit data exclusive OR XOR S 1 a S2 v 5T a S2 D 16 bit data exclusive NOR XNR S 1 a S2 v 5T a 52 gt D Data conversion instructions Word 16 bit data unite Block check code calculation Hexadecimal data ASCII code ASCII code Hexadecimal data WUNI S1 a S3 v S2 a 53 D When S3 is HO S2 D When S3 is HFFFF S1 D Creates the code for checking the data specified by S2 and S3 and stores itin D The calculation method is specified by S1 Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD H 42 41 44 43 B ADC Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and s
210. omputer link Name Description Part No This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPX Communication cassette two wire RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links C FPG COM3 1 channel RS485 type NET general purpose serial communication and a PLC link FPS 8 3 Computer Link 1 N communication 8 3 3 Settings of System Register and Unit No Setting of system register To carry out 1 N communication with a computer link the system registers should be set as shown below COM 1 port settings Unit No for COM 1 port 1 to 99 Set the desired unit No Communication mode for COM 1 port Computer Link Communication format for COM 1 port Character bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Baud rate setting for COM 1 port 9600 bps The communication format and baud rate transmission speed should be set to match the connected computer i Note When a C NET adapter is used the number of unit station is max 32 Setting of unit No station number The Unit No parameter for each of the communication ports is set to 1 in the system register default settings There is no need to change this if 1 1 communication is being used but if 1 N communication is being used to connect multiple PLCs to transmission line suchas ina C NET the Unit No must be specified so that the system can identify t
211. on counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire A g CORRECT INCORRECT Clockwise Counter clockwise Figure 139 Cautions regarding wiring 7 12 Chapter 8 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 8 1 Computer Link 0i3 fac etiue cue ke et etm es ited 8 3 8 2 Connection Example with External Device 8 11 8 3 Computer Link 1 N communication 8 18 Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS FPX 8 1 Computer Link 8 1 Computer Link This section explains about overview of computer link function 8 1 1 Overview of Function Computer FPS C Command message nee EE Response message With a computer link first an instruction command is sent from the computer to the PLC and then the PLC sends a reply response back to the computer Figure 140 FP Overview of computer link function What is the computer link A computer link is a function that carries out communication between a computer and PLC making it possible to monitor and control the PLC operating status from a computer Conversation is carried out between the two by instructions commands being sent from the computer to the PLC and the PLC replying sending response messages back to the computer A MEWNET exclusive protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchang
212. operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended e Turnon the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode e Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized t Note When stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped Operating Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground for each device 5 22 FPS 5 6 Safety Measures 5 6 2 ___ Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 4 ms the FP continues to operate If the power is off for 4 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset 5 6 3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections Power supply An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a p
213. performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit e Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct e Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws e Setthe mode selector to PROG mode Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program Operation procedure when using FPWIN GR Ver 2 Procedure 1 Select Online Edit Mode on the FPWIN GR On line menu Select Clear Program on the Edit menu When the confirmation dialog box is displayed click on Yes to clear the program Before You Start FP Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures e Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of a file documents should be printed out and then saved e Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a password is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case itis forgotten at some poin
214. port It supports 1 1 computer links and general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible Terminal layout FPX Abbreviation Name Signal direction RR Received data 2 Unit lt External device Figure 131 FPE 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette FPS 7 2 Communication Cassette 1 channel RS485 type Part No FPG COM3 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a two wire RS 485 port It supports 1 N computer links and general purpose serial communication Terminal layout FPS Abbreviation Name Signal direction Transmission line Transmission line Transmission line Transmission line Terminal station setting Figure 132 FPE 1 channel RS485 type communication cassette 7 2 2 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports The tool port provided as a standard feature of the FP is treated as the COM 0 port The ports in which the communication cassettes are installed are treated as the COM 1 portand COM 2 port The principle applications of the various ports are as described below When using When the 1 channel When the 2 channel When the 1 channel Port name only the FP2 RS232C type has RS232C type has RS485 type has contorl unit been added been added been added Tool port Tool port Tool port Tool port Sore Oner Computer link Computer link Computer link Computer link Computer
215. pprox 500us approx 700us with 30 steps setting with 60 steps setting with 30 steps setting with 60 steps setting Pulse output instruction F172 PLSH If CW CCW is set approx 20 us J OG operation If Pulse Sign is set approx 320 us Pulse output instruction F174 SPOH Data If CW CCW is set approx 30 us table control If Pulse Sign is set approx 330 us PWM output instruction F173 PWMH Approx 30 us If Pulse Sign is set a waiting time approx 300 us is included from the time that the Sign output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 3__ High speed Counter Function This section explains about the high speed counter function of FP 6 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function High speed counter function The high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match on instruction F166 HC1S To turn off an output use the target value match off instruction F167 HC1R Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set system register Nos 400 and 401 6 3 2 Types of Input Modes Addition input mode Oe UL ee ee ag
216. pulses have been counted the frequency switches to 2 500 Hz Positioning is then carried out sequentially in accordance with the values of the data table until it stops at the data table containing the pulse output stop value K0 When the program is run the data table and pulse output diagram are as shown below Positioning data table Bate Control code 1 H 1200 pried Frequency 1 2 1000 Hz Brice Target value 1 3 1000 pulses Frequency 2 2500 Hz Target value 2 2500 pulses Frequency 3 500 Hz Target value 3 5000 pulses Frequency 4 1000 Hz Target value 4 2000 pulses BTAIS Pulse output stop setting FPS 6 4 Pulse Output Function 1 Control code H constant Hj jj jj j ij Upper word 0 Fixed I Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Operation mode 0 Incremental Specifies the amount of travel number of pulses 1 Absolute Specifies the target value absolute value Output method 0 CW addition counting 1 CCW 2 PLS SIGN forward off 3 PLS SIGN reverse ah subtraction counting addition counting subtraction counting addition counting subtraction counting 4 PLS SIGN forward on 5 PLS SIGN reverse off ey Ee 2 Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 units Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set
217. r 13 42 System registers 13 14 System watchdog timer 12 7 T Target value match off instruction F167 Target value match on instruction F166 6 15 Terminal layout diagram 2 12 Terminal station 8 22 Tool port 2 6 Transmission error 12 11 Troubleshooting 12 5 Two phase input mode 6 11 Two wire type sensor 5 13 Type home return 6 28 Type II home return 6 28 U Unit station number setting switch 2 5 Unitno 10 6 Unit types 1 6 W Weight 13 4 Wiring of communication cassette 7 11 Wiring of MIL connector type 5 17 Wiring of power supply 5 9 Index FP Record of changes Record of changes Manual No ARCT1F 333E ACG M333E ARCT1F333E 1 ACG M333E 1 Sept 2001 Feb 2002 Description of changes First edition 2nd edition SAdditions Control units FPG C32T2 FPG C24R2 Expansion unit FPG XY64D2T Tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 4 Record of changes FPS GLOBAL NETWORK 2 http www mew europe com E Germany Matsushita Electric Works Europe AG Rudolf Diesel Ring 2 D 83607 Holzkirchen Germany Tel 49 8024 648 0 Germany Matsushita Electric Works Deutschland G m b H United Kingdom Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd Sireland Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd Irish Branch Office Austria Matsushita Electric Works Austria G m b H Switzerland Matsushita Electric Works
218. r 2 0 and subsequent versions of the FPE control unit C32T2 a mode can be used in which a target value is specified for jogging operation and pulses are stopped when that target value is reached As shown below the control code is used to select this mode and the target value an absolute value is then specified in the data table Data table Pulse output diagram xB es Be Control code 1 H11110 OFF J OG command i Frequency 2 300 Hz 300Hz YO Pulse Target value 3 K1000 OHz Target value matching Pulse stopping E High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS Positioning control instruction F174 Data table control The positioning performs according to the specified data table in order a DMV H 1200 DT400 Control code H1200 F1 DMV K 1000 DT402 Frequency 1 1 000Hz F1 DMV K 1000 DT404 Target value 1 1 000 pulses F1 DMV K 2500 DT406 Frequency 2 2 500Hz F1 DMV K 2000 DT408 Target value 2 2 000 pulses F1 DMV K 5000 DT410 Frequency 3 5 000Hz F1 DMV K 5000 DT412 Target value 3 5 000 pulses F1 DMV K 1000 DT414 Frequency 4 1 000Hz F1 DMV K 2000 DT416 Target value 4 2 000 pulses F1 DMV K 0 DT418 output pulse stops R10 H DF F174 SP0H DT400 KO Pulse output control When the execution condition R10 goes on pulses are output from YO at a frequency of 1 000 Hz and positioning begins At the point when 1 000
219. r PLC link 128 128 Starting no for link register transmission 0 40 No 45 o O Link register transmission size 40 40 When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 transmitted area can be transmitted to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 received areas Also the No 1 received area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 transmitted areas No 4 is allocated as a received area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit itto other unit 10 12 FPS 10 2 Communication Parameter Settings Using only a part of the link area Link areas are available for PLC link and link relay 1 024 points 64 words and link register 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation No 40 Range of link relay used for PLC link Received area Used No 42 Starting no for link relay transmission No 43 Link relay transmission size With the above setting the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays Not used Internal relay Figure 211 Using only a part of the link relay area Link register allocation LDO 39 Range of link register used for PLC link Used 40 Starting no for link register transmission Link register transmission size 79 80 With the above
220. r devices 12 7 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPS 12 2 4 If Outputting does not Occur as Desired Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads Ifthe power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again Ifthe poweris not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool If the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input output function If the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check If the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 3 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer If the power is not supplied to the input t
221. ram of unit No 1 FP contorl unit When X1 is input the LO of the link relay goes on and when X2 is input the L1 of the link relay goes on X1 LO X2 Di EE E s u nit No 3 FP control unit begins operation Figure 220 Sample program unit No 1 Program of unit No 2 FP contorl unit When the LO of the link relay goes on YO is output Figure 221 Sample program unit No 2 Program of unit No 3 FP contorl unit When the L1 of the link relay goes on YO is output Figure 222 Sample program unit No 3 10 21 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP 10 5 PLC Link Response Time 10 5 1 PLC Link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula T max 7s1 Ts2 TSn Tlt Tso Tlk L___ TIk link addition processing time Ts transmission time per station Tso master station scan time Tit link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time Tpc PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx sending time per byte x Pem PLC link sending size Ttx 1 transmission speed x 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Pcm 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 2 Tit link table sending time Tit Ttx sending time per byte x Ltm link table sending size Ttx 1
222. reated automatically The parity check can be skipped by entering ASCII code H2A2A instead of the BCC End code Terminator Messages must always end with a Cp ASCII code HOD me next page 8 5 Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS is Notes Precautions when writing messages e The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command e If there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent Response message The PLC that received the command in the previous page sends the results of the processing to the computer Start code Unit No of source PLC that processed the command in decimal i rocessing results and communication error codes are stored here L Check code BCC Hexadecimal E End code HE One digit digit Read value specified contact is off L name Processing results for contact area read Response code indicates a normal processing result indicates that an error occurred Figure 144 FPE Response message format Start code Header A ASCII code H25 or lt ASCII code H3C must be at the beginning of a message The response must start with the same start code that was at the beginning of the command Unit No
223. receive subsequent data you must execute an F159 MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done flag R9038 R 9048 RO H _ F159 MTRN DT100 K 0 K 1 To repeatedly perform only reception specify KO R9038 R 9048 also turns off when transmission is performed with a byte number specification No The contact numbers in parentheses indicate COM 2 port contacts f Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS 9 3 Connection Example with External Devices This section explains about the connection example with external devices 9 3 1 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with Micro Imagechecker Outline The FP and Micro Imagechecker A200 A100 are connected using an RS232C cable and the results of the scan are stored in the data registers of the FP Communication mode General Communication Communication mode Normal mode 3 Micro Ilmagechecker 3 A200 A100 Figure 181 FPE Connection example with external device micro imagechecker When the scan start code S p is sent from the FP side the scan resultis returned from the Micro Imagechecker as the response Communication cassette used with 1 1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1 1 general purpose serial Communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FP Communication cassette five wire RS232C por
224. rection output on and deviation counter reset 30 Type II home return CW 31 Type II home return CCW 32 Type Il home return Direction output off Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Direction output on CW and deviation counter reset CCW and deviation counter reset Direction output off and deviation counter reset Direction output on and deviation counter reset 3 4 Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 KHz K1 to K9800 units Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approximately 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 KHz K48 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approximately 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 KHz K191 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approximately 0 8 kHz Acceleration deceleration time ms K constant With 30 steps K30 to K32767 With 60 steps K36 to K32767 Deviation counter clear signal ms K constant 0 5 ms to 100 ms KO to K100 Set value and error 0 5 ms or less Specify KO when not using or when specifying 0 5 ms If a value is written that exceeds the specified range of the deviation counter clear signal it will be revised to a value within the range Figure 96 FPE Control code of F171 instruction High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FP Va S Tip Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for
225. red among up to 16 FP units using the PLC link function Figure 3 Features communication PLC link Positioning control supported through high speed counter and pulse output A high speed counter and pulse output functions are provided as standard features The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100 kHz enabling positioning control using a stepping motor or servo motor Measurement using high speed counter supported Increment input mode decrement input mode 2 phase input mode individual input mode and direction discrimination mode are supported Single phase Max 50 kHz Two phase Max 20 kHz FPS Encoder Pulse input SLL LL Encoder Pulse input JUUUL Figure 4 Features High speed counter Positioning control based on pulse output supported CW CCW and Pulse sign outputs are supported 1 channel Max 100 kHz 2 channel Max 60 kHz FPZ Pulse output Mortor driver UUL Pulse output Mortor driver JUUL Figure 5 Features Pulse output 1 4 FP 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit Analog control supported An analog potentiometer volume dial is provided as a standard feature This can be used in applications such as analog timers without using the programming tools An analog unit is also available as the intelligent unit Functions and Restrictions of the Unit FP 1 2 _Unit Types This section explai
226. rn Aio Paging Start up Saraan Saig Haid PLC Darvin Wile OE Figure 155 GTWIN GT Configuration setting screen basic setup Communication Function 1 Computer Link FPS 8 3 Computer Link 1 N communication This section explains about the 1 N communication of computer link 8 3 1 Overview of 1 N Communication For a 1 N computer link the computer and the FP are connected through a commercially available RS232C RS485 conversion adapter and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS 485 cable Communication is carried out by the command specifying the unit number being sent from the computer side and the PLC with that unit number sending a response back to the computer FP gt FP gt FP gt FP UnitNo 1 Unit No 2 Unit No 3 Unit No 4 Computer Commercially IS available HA conversion adapter RS232C RS485 The unit number for the PLC to which the command is being sent is included in the command message The unit number of the PLC sending a response is included in the response message Figure 156 FP Overview of compute link function 1 N communication Tip If the FP is used in combination with a communication cassette the 1 channel RS 485 type no C NET adapter is necessary on the PLC side 8 3 2 Communication Cassette Used for 1 N Communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1 N communication with a c
227. rns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R9065 i A when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R9066 i i when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R9067 i when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R9068 i i when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R9069 i when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R906A i when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R906B i i when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R906C i f Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped
228. rotective element such as a fuse Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally Installation and Wiring FPS 5 7 _ Backup Battery This section explains installation lifetime of backup battery and battery alarm error function setting 5 7 1__ Installation of Backup Battery Installing a backup battery in the FPE makes it possible to access clock calendar functions for use in addition to backing up data registers and other data Using a screwdriver or similar tool open the battery cover Figure 54 FP Backup battery installation procedure 1 Connect the connector and place the battery so that the battery terminal fits between the two tabs Figure 55 FP Backup battery installation procedure 2 Insert the battery cover from above Figure 56 FP Backup battery installation procedure 3 FPE 5 7 Backup Battery 5 7 2 __ System Register Setting Setting the battery error alarm In the system register default settings No 4 Alarm Battery Error is set to Off When using the battery set system register No 4 of the control unit so that the battery error alarm is turned on Setting procedure using FPWIN GR 1 Select PLC Configuration on the Option menu and click on Action
229. rred before cancelling the error When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error oc 12 6 FPS 12 2 Troubleshooting 12 2 2 __If the ERROR ALARM LED Lights Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been stopped Procedure 1 Setthe mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on If the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the FP control unit Please contact your dealer If the ERROR ALARM LED is flashed go to page 12 5 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode If the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check the program referring the following Check if instructions such as J ump or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan can never finish Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession 12 2 3 _ If None of the LEDs Light Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FP control unit is in the range of the rating Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP control unit is shared with them If the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment increase the capacity of the power Supply or prepare another power supply for othe
230. rror near 100 kHz approximately 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 KHz K191 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approximately 0 8 kHz 3 Target value Absolute value Can be specified for only Ver 2 0 or later This is used when setting the target value match stop mode Absolute only Designate the target value setting in the range indicated below If an out of range value is designated the number of pulses output will be different than the desinated value The target value setting is ignored in the no count mode Output method Range of target values which can be designated Addition counting Designate a value larger than the current value Subtraction counting Designate a value smaller than the current value Figure 100 FP Control code of F172 instruction FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function a S There are two operation modes in which jogging feed can be carried out with the FP one in which no target value is specified and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached Normal jogging feed mode in which no target value is specified Pulses are output in accordance with the condition set for the data table as long as the condition is on Data table Pulse output diagram DT300 Control code 1 H1110 er Li AB OFF JOG command 4 ae Frequency 2 300 Hz 300Hz OHZ Mode in which output stops when the target value is reached supported in Ver 2 0 and subsequent versions With Ve
231. rror occurs during data communication This goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction R904A to R904F R9050 R9051 to R905F COM 2 port reception done flag during gen eral purpose commu nicating COM 2 port transmis sion done flag during general purpose communicat ing Turns on when the end code is received during the general purpose com munication This goes on when transmission has been completed when using general purpose communication It goes off when transmission is requested when using general purpose communication eo MEWNET WO PLC link transmission error flag When using MEWNET WO turns on when transmission error occurs at PLC link turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings Pe i ns 13 25 Specifications FPS R9060 MEWNET WO Unit No 1 Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in the PLC link PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when transmission an error is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode assurance rela R9061 i when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R9062 i i when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in the mode Turns off when operation is stopped when is occurring or when notin the PLC link mode R9063 i f when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in the mode Tu
232. ry life Comment storage Link function Other functions i Notes Available year month day hour minute second and day of week However this can only be used when a battery has been installed Note 3 2 points Resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 220 days or more actual usage value approx 840 days 25 C Periodic replacement interval 1 year value applies when no power is supplied at all All kinds of comments including I O comments remarks and block comments can be stored Without backup battery Computer link 1 1 1 N Note 4 General purpose communication 1 1 1 N Note 4 Note 5 PLC link Note 6 Program edition during RUN constant scan forced on off pass word floating point operation and PID processing 1 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R900 to R97F data registers 55 words DT32710 to DT32764 When the optional battery is used all area can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers 2 The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer 3 Precision of calender timer At 0_C 32 F less than 119 second error per month At25 C 77_F less than 51 seconds error per month At55 C 131 F less than 148 seconds error per month 4 An optional communication cassette RS 232C type is required in order to use 1 1 commu
233. s 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 Connection Example with External Devices ccc cece eee ees 9 16 9 3 1 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with Micro Imagechecker 9 16 9 3 2 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with FP series PLC cece eae 9 22 Data Transmitted and Received with the FPS cece eee eee 9 29 LEN COMMUNICAION vcicntecited nire pite rinw weet Kir EEr wees 9 31 9 5 1 Overview of 1 N Communication 0 cece eee ee ees 9 31 9 5 2 Communication Cassette Used with 1 N Communication 9 31 9 5 3 Setting of System Register ccc eee eee eee 9 32 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 9 33 9 6 1 When STX not exist is Set for Start Code and CR is Set for End Codey seesiererieip cineri cer renha nea 9 33 9 6 2 When STX is Set for Start Code and ETX is Set for ENG Cod pics dex noite sader Gey eee oboe Aae TEE ew ee ees 9 35 Changing the Communication Mode of COM Port 0eees 9 37 Chapter 10 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 PLC Kvn id exch tates aaa hee ENE he kee oe ee a ee eee 10 3 10 1 1 Overview of Function o a 10 3 Communication Parameter Settings aaa 10 5 10 2 1 Setting of Communication Mode aaa 10 5 102 2 Setting of UIE Nn sre esiin Cero oia p Meinl EE 10 6 10 2 3 Allocation of Link Relay and Link Regi
234. s 4 3 xn mA or FPO E16T 25 mA or 4 3 xnmA or 3xnmA orless FPO E16YT 25 mA or 3xnmA orless FPO E32T 40 mA or 4 3 xn mA or 3xnmA orless FPO intelli FP0 A21 20 mA or 100 mA or less gent unit FP0 A80 20 mA or 60 mA or less FPO IOL 30 mA or 40 mA or less Commu nication cassette FPG COM1 FPG COM2 20 mA or FPG COM3 25 mA or 13 4 FPS 13 1 Table of Specifications 13 1 2 Performance Spec ifications FPG C32T FPG C32T2 FPG C24R2 Number of control lable I O points Control unit When using FPO expan sion units 32 points DC input 16 Transistor out 32 points DC input 16 Transistor out 24 points DC input 16 Relay output 8 put 16 Max 128 points up to 3 units put 16 Max 128 points up to 3 units Max 120 points up to 3 units When using transistor out put type expansion units When using FP expan sion units When using FPO and FP gt expansion units Programming method C ontrol method Not possible Max 288 points up to 4 units Max 280 points up to 4 units When using transistor out put type expansion units Max 376 points up to FPO 3 units and FP 4 units When using transistor out put type expansion units Max 384 points up to FPO 3 units and FP 4 units Relay symbol Cyclic operation Program memory Built in
235. s l0 to ID 13 12 FP 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Constant Decimal constants K K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation integer type K 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal H HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constants HO to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Decimal constants F monorefined real number j Notes F 1 175494 x 10 38 to F 3 402823 x 1038 F1 175494 x 10 38 to F3 402823 x 1038 1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration 2 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R900 to R97F data registers 55 words DT32710 to DT32764 When the optional battery is used all area can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers 3 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting 13 13 Specifications FPS 13 4 Table of System Registers This section explains about system registers for FP 13 4 1 System Registers What is the system register area System registers are used to set values parameters which determine op
236. s are output from CW output Y 0 or CCW output Y 1 of specified channel CHO If the current value at that point is larger than 22 000 the pulses are output from Y1 and if the value is smaller than 22 000 the pulses are output from Y 2 0V 24V DC Pulse output CW Motor driver side 10 000 22 000 30 000 Regardless of the current value its movement is towards position 22 000 Figure 112 FPEX Sample program absolute value positioning operation FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function Program X8 R903A R32 R30 The data table headed by DT100 is used HF ear TMX 0 K10 eer DMV H1110 DT100 F1DMmV K200 DT102 FipMv K4000 DT104 F1DMV K250 DT106 FipMv K22000 oT108 FlDMV KO OT 110 F171 SPDH DT 100 KO J Pulses are output from CHO R903A R30 TO R32 H 1110 ARR Initial speed 200 Hz DT104 DT105 DT106 ahma DT107 Acceleration time 250 msec DT108 DT109 arget value Movement amount 22 000 pulses Control code H1110 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Absolute CW and CCW Maximum speed 4 000 Hz The data table headed by DT100 is usedand pulses are output from CHO J Positioning done pulse 1 second 2 Olstypetmer Figure 113 FPX Sample program absolute value positioning operation program Pulse output diagram 4 000 Hz 1 nE a
237. s executed at the rise of R9014 and the same value should be set for all of the PLCs in the link Executing the above instruction does not change any of the system registers The SYS1 instruction should be set to a value at least twice that of the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link If a short value has been set there is a possibility of the transmission assurance relay malfunctioning However the shortest time that can be set is 100 ms The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any particular problems 10 26 FP Chapter 11 Other Functions 11 1 Analog Potentiometer cece eee eee ees 11 3 11 2 Clock Calendar Function 0c ccc eee eae 11 4 Other Functions FPS 11 2 FPS 11 1 Analog Potentiometer 11 1 Analog Potentiometer This section explains about the analog potentiometer 11 1 1 _ Overview of Analog Potentiometer The FP is equipped with two analog potentiometers as a standard feature Turning the potentiometers changes the values of the special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within a range of KO to K1000 Using this function makes it possible to change the internal set values in the PLC without using the programming tool so this can be used for example with analog clocks to change the set value externally by turning the potentiometer
238. s not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error ora self diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred Procedure 1 Check to see if the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing If the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing check the contents noted on page 12 5 Procedure 2 Execute a total check function to determine the location of the syntax error 12 10 FPS 12 2 Troubleshooting 12 2 7 Ifa Transmission Error has Occurred Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two terminals and the two terminals of the units and that the final unit has been correctly connected Procedure 2 Check to see if the transmission cables are within the specifications range referring to page 7 11 Atthis point make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type and that multiple types of cables are not being used Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal Station Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap 12 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPS 12 12 Chapter 13 Specifications 13 1 Table of Specifications v0 5 eric ee aes ave eens 13 3 13 2 YO NO ANOCaAtION cece ete ee enue ered uiian 13 10 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 13 12 13 4 Table of System Registers 005 13 14 13 5 Table of Special Internal Relays 13 21 13 6 Table of Special
239. sample program is run Transmission buffer Reception buffer DT100 K2 Number of DT200 Received bytes to be number of DT101 H53 S H25 transmitted DT201 bytes Statuses before DT202 Received data is stored in order from the lower order byte transmission DT203 DT204 Statuses when reception is completed Figure 186 FP Various buffer statuses Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS 9 3 2 Connection Example with External Device 1 1 communication with FP series PLC Outline Connect the FP and the other FP series PLC using the RS232C interface and carry out communication using the MEWTOCOL COM communication protocol Communication mode General Communication Data area read command 01 RDDO00000 00001 CR transmission q Value of specified data register Figure 187 FP Connection example with external device FP series PLC Communication mode Computer link FP series PLC alae cle 1800 69 0 a When the data area read command 01 R DD00000 00001 p is sentfrom the FPE side the values of the data register of the PLC connected to the system are sent as a response For example if the value K100 is stored in DTO and the value K200 is stored in DT1 of the PLC 01 RD6400C
240. set the target value for the axis which will not be operated to 0 b In absolute mode set the target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 5 6 7 Component speed Initial speed and maximum speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type Composite speed x X axis movement distance X axis component speed aaa V X axis movement distance Y axis movement distance 2 Composite speed x Y axis movement distance Y a xis co m pon ent s p ee d mm y X axis movement distance Y axis movement distance 2 Example Even if the initial speed is corrected See 6 the calculation value will be stored as is in the operation result storage area Frequency range The system automatically selects the frequency range for each component of each axis Range 0 1 5Hz to 9 8kHz Range 1 48Hz to 100kHz Range 2 191Hz to 100kHz a If maximum speed 9800Hz If initial speed lt 1 5Hz initial speed is corrected to 1 5Hz and range 0 is selected If initial speed 2 1 5Hz range 0 is selected b If 9800Hz lt maximum speed 100000Hz If initial speed lt 48Hz initial speed is corrected to 48Hz and range 0 is selected If 48Hz initial speed lt 191Hz range 1 is selected If initial speed 2 191Hz range 2 is selected Number of acceleration deceleration steps The system automatically c
241. setting the 28 words consisting of LD100 to LD127 can be used as internal registers Not used Figure 212 Using only a part of the link register area 10 13 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP Precautions when allocating link areas If a mistake is made when allocating a link area be aware that an error will result and communication will be disabled Avoid overlapping transmitted areas When sending data from the transmitted area to the received area of another FP there must be a link relay and link register with the same number in the received area on the receiving side In the example shown below there is an area between No 2 and No 3 which is overlapped and this will cause an error so that communication cannot be Carried out Link relay allocation FPS FP FPS Unit No 1 Unit No 2 Unit No 3 Transmitted f ee Received area l area Received area g Transmitted 2 Received area Transmitted a Received area area Figure 213 P recautions when allocating link relay area System register Set value of various control unit s Range of link relay used for PLC link 64 Starting no for link relay transmission 0 Link relay transmission size 20 10 14 FPS 10 2 Communication Parameter Settings Unallowable allocations Allocations such as those shown below are not possible either for link relays or link registers Allocations in which the transmitted area
242. simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input Example When the high speed counter is being used in the incremental input mode even if input X0 is specified as an interrupt input and as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and input X0 functions as counter input for the high speed counter 13 18 FP 13 4 Table of System Registers Unit No setting Default Descriptions value Selection of modem connection 1 1 to 99 Disabled Enabled Disabled Character bit Enter the settings for the various items 8 bits Character bit 7bits 8bits Parity check Parity chk none with odd with even with odd Stop bit 1bit 2bits Stop bit 1 bit Communication speed Baud rate setting Communication format setting Communication speed Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Computer link Computer link General communication PLC link Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled Disabled Character bit Enter the settings for the various items 8 bits Character bit 7bits 8bits Parity check Parity chk none with odd with even with odd Stop bit 1bit 2bits Stop bit 1 bit The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General com munication End c
243. sion 32 bit gray code binary data conversion Bit line to bit column conversion Bit column to bit line conversion Comparing character strings Converts the gray codes of S to binary data and the converted result is stored in the D Converts the gray code of S 1 S to binary data and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D The values of bits line 0 to 15 of S are stored in bit column n of D to D 15 The values of bit column n of S to S 15 are stored in bits line 0 to 15 of D These instructions compare two specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special internal relay Character string coupling These instructions couple one character string with another Number of char acters in a char acter string These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string Search for char acter string The specified character is searched in a character string Retrieving data from character strings right side These instructions retrieve a specified number of char acters from the right side of the character string Retrieving data from character strings left side These instructions retrieve a specified number of char acters from the left side of the character string Retrieving a character string from a charac ter string S1 S2 S3 D These instructions retrieve a character
244. ster 10 10 10 2 4 Setting the Largest Station Number fora PLC Link 10 16 Monitoring When a PLC Link is Being Used cc cece eee eee 10 17 10 3 1 Monitoring Using RelayS ccc ccc cee eee eens 10 17 Connection Example of PLC Link wiscenuic ce teats a hetaioe ts idan s 10 18 10 4 1 Using a PLC Link with Three FPS Units 000 10 18 10 4 2 Sample ProgramS tied ead eruted Va eta age Poa Reeds 10 21 PLC Link Response Time reickarad bhaice sands naaran 10 22 10 5 1 PLC Link Response TMG cies ase an eee eee ea 10 22 10 5 2 Shortening the Transmission Cycle Time When There are Stations That Have not been Added to the Link 10 25 10 5 3 Error Detection Time for Transmission Assurance Relays 10 26 Table of Contents FPS Chapter 11 Other Functions 11 1 Analog Potentiometer sass 2 ianwenteiiwrta these Pride sen 11 3 11 1 1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer cece eee 11 3 11 1 2 Example Showing How the Analog Potentiometers are Used 11 3 11 2 Clock Calendar Function 5 1t 5 2 atdraes 84 aea 11 4 11 2 1 Area for Clock Calendar Function aee 11 4 11 2 2 Setting of Clock Calendar Function cc cece eee 11 4 11 2 3 Precautions Concerning Backup of Clock Calendar Data 11 5 11 2 4 Example Showing the Clock Calendar being Used 11 6 Chapter 12 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 12 1 Self Diagnostic Function eie4 ceva ove ba
245. stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT 90015 when the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT90017 DT90018 Operation error address hold type Operation error address non hold type is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of scan the address is 0 Monitor the address using decimal display DT90019 DT90020 DT90021 DT90022 2 5ms ring counter Not used Not used Scan time current value Note The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5ms HO to HF FFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5ms Elapsed time be tween the two points DT90015 and DT90016 when the division in struction F33 D or F53 DB is executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal dis play DT90023 Scan time minimum value Note N A A A A A The address where a operation error occurred A A N A A A DT90024 i Note Scan time maximum value Note A N A N A N A N A N A
246. t FPS Programming Tool Restrictions Programming Tool Restrictions Type of programming tool Instruction used function restrictions Ta alse aba Oar FPWIN Pro Ver 4 All instructions and functions can be used FPWIN GR Ver 2 All instructions and functions can be used Windows software FPWIN GR Ver 1 Not used NPST GR Ver 4 MS DOS software Not used NPST GR Ver 3 AFP1114V2 Handy programming unit AFP1114 FP programmer AFP1112A AFP1112 Not used i Notes Precautions concerning programming tools e Programming tools used with the FP require FPWIN Pro Ver 4 or later or Ver 2 or a subsequent version of the FPWIN GR Please be aware that other tools cannot be used e Either FPWIN Pro Ver 4 1 or later or FPWIN GR Ver 2 1 or later are necessary for use the C32T2 and C24R2 types control unit xi Compatibility with the FPO FPS Compatibility with the FPO Program compatibility The following points require attention if using FPO programs on the FP e Pulse output function With the FP please be aware that the following changes have been made to instructions concerning pulse output Trapezoidal control For the FPO F168 SPD1 For the FP F171 SPDH Jog feed F169 PLS F172 PLSH Data table control None F174 SPOH Linear interpolation control None F175 SPSH F176 SPCH F173 PWMH Circular interpolation control None PWM output F170 P
247. t Q 2 O 7 D Figure 190 FP Procedure of communication FP series PLC Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FP Sample program The following shows an example in which an FP series PLC is connected to the COM 1 port R10 RO OF lt 1 R10 F95 ASC M 01 RDD00000 DT101 F95 ASC M 00001 uw DT107 Five spaces inserted FI59MTRN _DT100 k19 K1 c 2 m Y m fal H R11 H F10BKmv D201 DT208 DTO are written to data registers DTO to DT7 R11 DT1 H2431 R12 Hor yb l r R12 H F72 AHEX DT3 K8 Reception DT50 R11 FI59MTRN DT 100 KO Starting from DT100 the contents consisting of 0 bytes are sent from the COM 1 K1 port Figure 191 FPE Sample program for FP series PLC f Data transmission command The internal relay R10 is turned on at the timing of the transmission condition RO Data conversion 01 RDD00000 is converted to ASCII code and written to DT101 to DT106 00001 is converted to ASCII code and written to DT107 to DT112 J Data transmission The data in the transmission buffer is sent _ from the COM 1 port 2 The internal relay R11 is turned on at the L reception done contact R 9038 timing The received data in the received buffer is read from the area in which itis stored
248. t for right side expansion ovsesius ids pedeuerr ieee kas her 4 5 4 1 6 1 0 Number of FPO I O Link Unit for right side expansion 4 6 Chapter5 Installation and Wiring 5 1 Installation cts teikes ede Sadek aude Ee ee cee 5 3 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space 00 0 00s 5 3 5 1 2 Installation and Removal 0c eee eee eee 5 6 5 2 Wiring of Power Supply oscckeciseveds cee bed ee dae eer es ee wees xs 5 9 5 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply opal sonei nad 52 0 pedddale oe aebd bo 5 9 5 22 GROUNGING cole cad sax the pels ee toe Bowe Se Ee es S88 5 11 5 3 Wiring of Input ANG Output Wo io ves Se ey ehhh nh eter tere EVE tae 5 12 reek LIME Wining anse cond aena eon Ea E E EA RE EE acs 5 12 5 3 2 Output Wiring viii tendyesitew dl ewetas vaea iei Ea a 5 15 5 3 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings 5 16 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type sccccc os eae teats reeta reser e tances 5 17 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Types ita ce eye aaae 5 20 5 6 Safety MGASUIGS ie ii eke ae a e e E a a E a 5 22 5 6 1 Safety Measures ussssarrerarrnrara nananana 5 22 5 6 2 Momentary Power Failures usann 5 23 5 6 3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections 5 23 ST Backup Bater csrieio pedise nine he Mis bee he E a a e 5 24 5 7 1 Installation of Backup Battery cc cece cece eee 5 24 5 7 2 System Register Setting 6 2 cee 0s pee tan dveeetenes s 5 25 5 7 3 Lifetime of Backup
249. t It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible FPG COM1 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPx Communication cassette three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links 2 channel RS232C type and general purpose serial communication Communica tion with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 FPS 9 3 Connection Example with External Devices Setting of system register In the default settings the COM portis set to the computer link mode To carry out 1 1 communication using general purpose serial communication the system registers should be set as shown below Communication format setting for FP e Settings when using the COM 1 port Communication mode General communication Communication format Character bit Parity aaua Odd Stop bit a an 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Starting address for data received DT200 No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte e Settings when using the COM 2 port No 412 Communication mode General communication No 414 Communication format Character bit Parity aana Odd Stop bit os vay 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 418 Starting address for data received DT200 No 419 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Com
250. t together with carry flag R9009 data Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left together with carry flag R9009 data Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 1 Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 0 Invert the value of bit position n of the data of D F133 16 bit data bit test Test the value of bit position n of the data of D and output the result to R 900B F135 Number of on 1 bits in 16 bit data Store the number of on 1 bits in the data of S in D F136 Number of on 1 bits in 32 bit data Basic function instru ction STMR F137 Auxiliary timer 16 bit Store the number of on 1 bits in the data of S 1 S in D Turn on the specified output and R900D after set value S x 0 01 sec 13 57 Specifications FPS Special instructions F138 Hours minutes Converts the hour minute and second data of S 1 S and seconds to seconds data and the converted data is stored in data to seconds D 1 D data Seconds data to SHMS Converts the seconds data of S 1 S to hour minute hours minutes and second data and the converted data is stored in and seconds D 1 D data Carry flag set ST Turns on the carry flag R9009 c c F141 Carry flag reset Turns off the carry flag R
251. t GUEN Port Lise Wehi Waha E Comet Medl Con tads EE Erd j Badj Garean Fa Dam De Der T pan ie min Pain a Ej ai itera J apie fi ana ee ee i par me ere aaoi daad Pr paa Figure 166 FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No 412 Communication mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on the button and select General Communication from the displayed pull down menu No 413 for COM 1 port No 414 for COM 2 port Communication format setting The default settings for the communication Character Bit 8 Bits format are as shown at the right To change the communication format to PATY ipana Ode match the external device connected to the Stop bit 1 COM port enter the appropriate settings for Terminator CR the various items FPS 9 1 General purpose Serial Communication No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rates for the ports is 9600 bps Set the baud rate to match the external device connected to the COM port Click on the button and select one of the values from 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps on the displayed pull down menu No 416 for COM 1 port No 418 for COM 2 port Starting address for data received No 417 for COM 1 port No 419 for COM 2 port Buffer capacity setting for data received To use general purpose serial communication the received bu
252. t No parameter must be set in order to identify the various PLCs Max 16 units T a l M RS 485 Figure 204 FP Unit No for PLC link The unit number is a number assigned to a given PLC in order to identify that particular PLC Unit numbers should be specified in such a way that the same number is not used for more than one PLC on the same network Setting method The unit number is specified using the system registers settings in the FPWIN GR programming tool and the unit No setting switch on the side of the FP control unit Setting the unit No setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid 10 6 FPS 10 2 Communication Parameter Settings To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR select PLC Configuration under Option on the menu bar and then click on the COM 1 Port tab PLC Configuration setting dialog box Figure 205 FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No 410 Unit No setting for COM 1 port Click on the button and select a unit number from among the numbers 1 to 16 displayed on the pull down menu 10 7 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP Unit number setting using unit No setting switch The unit No setting switch is located inside the cover on the left side of the FP control unit The selector switch and the dial can be used in combination to seta unit number between 1 and 16 Unit No setting switch Se
253. t error Not paired error Parameter mismatch error Program area error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay This also occurs if the same timer counter number is being used Change to PROG mode and correct the program so that one relay is not used for two or more OT instructions and KP in structions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump J P and LBL one instruction is either missing or in an incorrect position Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For example the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer counter range setting Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written to a specific area main pro gram area or subprogram area has been written to a differentarea for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the cor rect area Compile memory full error High level instruction type error High level instruction operand com bination error The program stored in the FP is too large to compile in the pro gr
254. t for Start Code and ETX is Set for End Code When receiving data Relationship between the various flags Reception done flag and Transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction External received 4 B c STX D E TX F G ST H 1 data Cannot be Reception code is x stored when deleted by F159 Reception on reception done MTRN instruction done flag flag is on os R9038 or R9048 off on Reception done flag is 4 turned off by execut fia MITAN D ing the F159 MTRN nsirucaon off instruction execution Stored y y y Reception A A A A D D D D G G lef H H buffer Ha B B B E E E E e E E e E p C C C C e C C C C C C Jas Number of lt l gt lt 22 gt lt 33 gt lt 00 gt lt l gt lt 22 gt D gt lt 0 gt lt l gt lt 0 gt lt l gt lt l gt reception bytes Number of bytes Number of bytes Number of bytes l received is received is cleared received is Write pointer cleared when when F159 MTRN cleared when start code is instruction is start code is received executed received Figure 198 FP Flag operation when receiving data STX and ETX setting The data is stored in the reception buffer in sequential order but at the point at which the start code is received the number of bytes received is cle
255. t from an external device The R9038 R 9048 is off during the first scan after RUN 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the reception buffer Header and terminator Start and end codes are not stored Beginning of reception Reopening Received data A B gt T R U V on R9038 R 9048 to Execution condition on RO E L A J Execution of Reception Reception Reception is F159 MTRN is possible is not pos possible instruction sible Figure 180 Explanation during reception When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R 9038 R9048 turns off the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte FP gt 9 2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 2 Tip x To perform repeated reception of data refer to the following steps 1 Receive data Reception done R 9038 R 9048 on reception prohibited Process received data Execute F159 MTRN instruction R 9038 R 9048 off reception possible Receive subsequent data Preparation of reception The reception done flag R9038 R 9048 turns on when data reception from the external device is completed Reception of any further data is prohibited To
256. t is in the PROG mode PLC link transmission error relay R9050 This goes on if a problem is detected during transmission Relay No R9050 StationNo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Conditions ON When a transmission error has occurred in the PLC link or when there is an error in the setting for for on off the PLC link area OFF When there are no transmission errors Tip Monitoring the PLC link status The PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored by pressing down the PLC link switch on the FPWIN GR Status Monitor screen i Note It is not possible to carry out remote programming of other linked PLCs using the programming tool 10 17 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP gt 10 4 Connection Example of PLC Link This section explains about the connection example of PLC link 10 4 1 Using a PLC Link with Three FP gt Units In the example shown here link relays are used and when X1 of the control unit of unit No 1 goes on YO of the control unit of unit No 2 goes on When X2 of the control unit of unit No 1 goes on YO of the control unit of unit No 3 goes on Link relay LO turns on Link relay L1 turns on FPS Unit No 1 Teni Unit No 2 Unit No 3 Figure 216 FPE Connection when using a PLC link with three FP units Communication cassettes used with the PLC link The following types of communi
257. t of memory A full range of communication functions Using the Tool port RS232C provided as a standard feature on the main unit communication can be carried out with a display panel or computer Additionally communication cassettes with RS232C and RS485 interfaces are available as an option Installing a 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette in the FPE makes it possible to connect two devices with RS232C port A full lineup of communication functions means you can also work with 1 N communication and PLC link function up to 16 units Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FP When using the 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette Display panel C Two devices with RS232C port can be connected p m ap ap ap amp The Tool portcan be used al to connecta display panel or other device Device with RS232C port Figure 1 Features communication RS232C 1 N communication possible with up to 99 stations units When using the 1 channel RS485 type communication cassette Computer Communication is possible with up to 99 units FP gt FPS FPS FPS No 1 No 2 No 3 No 99 Commercial adapter RS485 Figure 2 Features communication C NET me next page 1 3 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit FP gt Data can be shared among the various PLCs using the PLC link function When using the 1 channel RS485 type communication cassette Data can be sha
258. t position Ye Yo Fx Fvsinod Fv Fy Fv cos 0 Fv Xe Xo FP 6 4 Pulse Output Function 1 2 3 4 5 Control code H constant 0 Fixed Operation connection mode 4 0 Stop 1 Continue Rotation direction 5 0 Clockwise direction Right rotation 1 Counterclockwise direction Left rotation Circular shape method 6 0 Pass position setting method 1 Center position setting method Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 03 Incremental PLS SIGN forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 13 Absolute PLS SIGN forward on reverse off Composite speed Frequency K constant 100 Hz to 20 kHz K100 to K20000 Target position and pass position K 8388608 to K8388607 Operation connection mode Stop When stop 0 is specified it will stop when the target position is reached Continue When the following circular interpolation data table is overwritten when continue 1 is specified after circular interpolation action begins the following circular interpolation begins when the first circular interpolation that was started up finishes target position reached To finish specify stop 0 for this flag operation connection mode after the last circular interpolation action has started Rotation direc
259. t the PLC link response time is longer e The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there is a station or stations that have not been added to the link 10 24 FPS 10 5 PLC Link Response Time 10 5 2 Shortening the Transmission Cycle Time When There are Stations That Have not been Added to the Link If there are stations that have not been added to the link the Tik time link addition processing time will be longer which causes the transmission cycle time to be longer T max Ts1 Ts2 Tsn Tlt Tso Tlk Tik TIc link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tls link error stop command sending time Tso master station scan time If the SYS1 instruction is used to shorten Twt in the above formula the increase in the transmission cycle time can be minimized Example of setting the SYS1 instruction SYS1 MPCLK1TO 100 Function description Changes the waiting time for a link to be added to the PLC link default value 400 ms In the above the waiting time is set to 100 ms Key words Setting for the No 1 key word PCLK1T0O Allowable setting range for the No 2 key word 10 to 400 10 ms to 400 ms j Notes Precautions concerning settings e The above instruction should be set so that it is executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 and the same value should be set for all of the PLCs being linked e Executing
260. taa wees ew dedeaceee vee dads 12 3 12 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition ccc cece eee 12 3 12 1 2 Operation on Error scaticei eee on wend Stk oN wees tated 12 4 12 2 Troubleshooting oceans het ee KCRG ees Pe da EE eK eee se ek 12 5 12 2 1 Ifthe ERROR ALARM LED Flashes 2005 12 5 12 2 2 Ifthe ERROR ALARM LED Lights scien tee teva tees 12 7 12 2 3 If None ofthe LEDS Light s 0 esis as es eke tas tees ncdaanes 12 7 12 2 4 If Outputting does not Occur as Desired 12 8 12 2 5 Ifa Protect Error Message Appears 005 12 10 12 2 6 Ifthe Program Mode does not Change to RUN 12 10 12 2 7 Ifa Transmission Error has Occurred osusu 12 11 Chapter 13 Specifications 13 1 Table of Specifications lt c vebe Sid node pent gawtevet nthe eet aay 13 3 13 1 1 General Specifications 2 26 cages tei ee ees oes eee ten eed 13 3 13 1 2 Performance Specifications 0 00 cece eee 13 5 13 2 VO NozAllocatoM pieeo ete n wae chile ate BA eye sees tiles 13 10 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants ccc eect eee eens 13 12 13 4 Table of System Registers 0 0 c cece eee eee 13 14 13 4 1 System Registers cand te ead ete ode tei ve ake seeS ace 13 14 13 4 2 Table of System Registers 0 cece eee eee 13 16 13 5 Table of Special Internal Relays 2 0c cece eee eee ee 13 21 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers aaau 13 28 vi FP T
261. ter function Figure 68 FP High speed counter function min input pulse width single phase min input pulse width two phase 6 3 4 1 0 Allocation The inputting and outputting as shown in the table on page 6 5 will differ depending on the channel number being used The output turned on and off can be specified from Y 0 to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R When using CHO with incremental input and reset input FP gt Count input x0 Reset input x2 On and off output Yn gt The output turned on and off when the target values match can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired Figure 69 FP High speed counter function I O allocation 1 When using CHO with two phase input and reset input FP gt A phase sae x0 B es input x1 Reset input x2 On and off output Yn gt The output turned on and off when the target values match can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired Figure 70 FP High speed counter function I O allocation 2 6 12 FPS 6 3 High speed Counter Function 6 3 5 Instructions Used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction F0 This instruction is used for counter operations such as software resetand countdisable Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Oper
262. th the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D Data can be sent with the start code and end code automatically attached A maximum of 2 048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 stored in the transmission buffer Starting from DT100 are sent from the COM 1 port Reception of data Reception of data is controlled by turning the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 on and off The received data is stored in the received buffer specified by the system register Data can be received when the F159 MTRN instruction turns the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 off Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS 9 1 3 Communication Parameter Settings when Using General purpose Serial Communications Setting of baud rate and communication format In the default settings the COM port is set to the computer link mode When communication is carried out system register settings should be entered for the following items Settings for the COM port baud rate and transmission format are entered using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Option O on the menu bar and click on the COM 1 amp 2 Port tab There are separate settings for the COM 1 and COM 2 ports PLC Configuration setting dialog box Hahi Hii Merhel Actonion ina al Hai Bpeed Counter Fiap ret Teo Pe
263. the PROG mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode Turns on when uni is in the RUN mode Turns off when un is in the PROG mode R9079 Turns on when uni s in the RUN mode Turns off when un s in the PROG mode Turns on when uni Turns off when un Turns on when uni Turns off when un Turns on when uni Turns off when un Turns on when uni Turns off when un Turns on when uni Turns off when un in the RUN mode in the RUN mode in the RUN mode in the RUN mode in the RUN mode in the PROG mode in the PROG mode in the PROG mode in the PROG mode in the PROG mode 13 27 Specifications FPS 13 6 Table of Special Data Registers The special data registers are one word 16 bit memory areas which store specific information A Available N A Not available DT90000 Self diagnostic error code The self diagnostic error code is stored here when a self diagnostic error occurs DT90001 Not used DT90002 Position of abnormal I O unit for FPZ left side expansion When an error occurs at FP expansion I O unit the bit corresponding to the unit No will be set on 1 Monitor using binary display 15 7 3 2 1 0 BitNo 3 2 1 0 Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal EE DT90004 Not used DT90005 Not used E DT90006 Position of abnormal intelli gent unit for FP left side ex pansion W
264. the above instruction does not change any of the system registers e The SYS1 instruction should be set to a value at least twice that of the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link e Ifa short value has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if the power supply to that PLC is on However the shortest time that can be setis 10 ms e If there are any stations that have not been added to the link the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any particular problems 10 25 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 10 5 3 Error Detection Time for Transmission Assurance Relays If the power supply for the PLC of any given station fails or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of that PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened using the SYS1 instruction Example of SYS1 instruction setting SYS1 MPCLK1T1 100 Function description This changes the time that the PLC link transmission assurance relay is off default value 6400 ms The above example shows the time being set to 100 ms Key words Specification of No 1 key word PCLK1T1 Allowable setting range for No 2 key word 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms t Notes Precautions concerning settings The above instruction should be set up at the beginning of the program so that it i
265. the largest Station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 EachPcm 23 4 8 x4 71 Tpc Tt x Pcm 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms Calculation example 3 When there is one station that has not been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x15 4 31 ms Tik 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When there are no stations that have not been added to an 8 unit link the largest station number is 9 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pcm 23 8 16 x4 119 Tpc Tt amp x Pcm 0 096 x 119 11 43 ms Each Ts 5 11 43 16 43 ms_ Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 8 2 79 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When there ar
266. ther side 01 RD6400C 8006F pis returned from the FP series PLC on the other side as the response when the program is executed The re ceived data is stored in the data registers as shown below DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DTO a Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte 0 0 4 6 D R 1 0 Value of DTO in the PLC on the other side DT7 DT6 DT5 Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte byte byte F 6 0 8 C aAa BCC Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other side Extracting the data register values from the PLC on the other side In the program the data segment of the response from the PLC on the other side is converted to hexadecimal data using the F72 AHEX hexadecimal ASCII hexadecimal data conversion instruction and stored in DT50 and DT51 only ifthe character string 1 stored in DT1 detected as a comparison instruction DT6 DT5 DT4 DR Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte H30 H30 H38 H43 H30 H30 H34 H36 0 0 8 C 0 0 4 6 Value of DT1 in the PLC on Value of DTO in the PLC the other side on the other side J3 Hexadecimal ASCII HEX conversion instruction F72 DT51 DT50 Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte H00 HC8 HOO H64 K200 K100 Value of DT1inthe Value of DTO in the PLC PLC on the other side on the other s
267. ting switch on the side of the FP control unit or the system register settings S etting the unitnumber setting switch to 0 makes the system register setting valid To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR select PLC Configuration under Option on the menu bar and then click on the COM Port tab There are two settings one for the COM 1 port and one for the COM 2 port PLC Configuration setting dialog box Hoihoi Hold Moret 2 Action on enor Tire Lik High Speed Courter Interrupt Input Teel Port COWI Pert COE Port Moti Lira fia fi F Hadi Coum Hode api WodewEnsbied f Nel Commercio F Hedi Erbse hbe pin e e a e Paw oni E Eine Siep Ei ji Siating addes ky dala neoaea of hatig sonal dale corer taake i 1 32765 Buiter capaci sefting bu date nsosered of T bese sonal date conair mocks 4i mD 20 Figure 159 FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No 410 for COM 1 port No 411 for COM 2 port Unit No setting Click on the button and select a unit number from among the numbers 1 to 99 displayed on the pull down menu i Notes e To make the unit number setting in the FPWIN GR valid set the unit No setting switch to 0 e The unit number setting using the station setting switch is valid only for the communication port of the communication cassette The unit number for the tool port should be set using the system registers e When using the C N
268. tion 10 2 1__Setting of Communication Mode In the default settings the COM ports are not setso that communication is enabled Communication mode settings are entered using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Option O on the menu bar and click on the COM 1 Port tab PLC Configuration setting dialog box HokdMonehokd HokiMorstoid 2 Action on Error Tie Link High Speed Counter hiamatea Tool Peri OOM Port CONE Peri Hanit UntMo fi Hai Conn Mocs 9 ModenEnabled 7 Slesing adess bv data received of Eo n Hong il lE a 0 327 Bulle capacity vetting bor date ecard of i acta tail data covanuricalion mode Pus mame Figure 203 FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No 412 Communication Mode Comm Mode Select the communication mode of COM port Click on the button and select PC Link from the displayed pull down menu 2 r N Tip When using a PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed as shown below Communication format Character Bit 8 bits P arity Odd Stop Bit 1 Baud rate 115200 bps A f ei 10 5 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function FP 10 2 2 Setting of Unit No Unit No In the default settings in the system registers the Unit No parameter for the communication port is set to 1 Ina PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the Uni
269. tion Pulses are output according to the designated direction Operation differs as indicated below depending on the pass position and rotation direction setting Counterclockwise direction Clockwise direction Left rotation Right rotation 6 a S 5 E E S Current position P Pass position E Target position gt Operation due to calculation result Circular shape method Pass position setting method The center position and the radius of the circular are calculated by specifying the pass and target positions for the current position Center position setting method The radius of the circular is calculated by specifying the center and target positions for the current position 6 39 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS ia Note i Note The circular interpolation control instruction can be used with the C32T2 control unit only Assume that the execution conditions for this instruction always hold When the execution conditions are off pulse output stops If you use one shot relay ex R101 below pls refer to the following program by using R903A and R903C in order to make internal relay hold ex R102 below Sample Program R101 R903A R903C R103 R102 DF R102 R102 f FipMv Hil00 pT600 F1DbMV K1000 pT602 _ FlpbMv Ko DT 604 FipMv Kk1000 pT606 _ FipMv KO DT608 F1pmv K500 DT610 F176 SPCH DT600 KO R903A R903C R102 R103 DF
270. to WX31 Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data External output relay Note 1 Internal relay Note 2 Link relay Data register Note 2 Link data register Note 2 Timer C ounter set value area Note 2 Timer Counter set value area Note 2 Special data register Index register WY WR WL 32 words 74 words Code for specifying 16 external output WYO to WY31 WY 0 to WY73 points as one word 16 bits of data 98 words WRO to WR97 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data 64 words WLO to WL63 Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word 16 bits of data 32 765 words DTO to DT32764 Data memory used in program Data is handled in 16 bit units one word 128 words LDO to LD127 This is a shared data memory which is used within the PLC link Data is han dled in 16 bit units one word Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and an initial value of a count er Stores by timer counter number 1 024 words SVO to V1023 1 024 words EVO to EV1023 Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer count er Stores by timer counter number 260 words DT 90000 to DT90259 Data memory for storing specific data Various settings and error codes are stored Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier 14 word
271. tores itin D Example H 44 43 42 41 gt HCDAB DC BA 4 digit BCD data ASCII code ASCII code 4 digit BCD data Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 214 3 Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 gt H3412 4321 16 bit binary data ASCII code Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores itin D area of S2 bytes 001 ASCII code 16 bit binary data Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D 001 32 bit binary data ASCII code Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 S1 to ASCII code and stores itin D 1 D ASCII code 32 bit binary data Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 D 13 54 FP gt 13 8 Table of Instructions S D 16 bit binary i Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S to data 4 digit four digits of BCD data and stores itin D BCD data Example K100 gt H100 4 digit BCD Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S to data 16 bit 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D binary dat
272. transmission speed x 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Ltm 13 2 xn n number of stations being added 3 Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool 4 Tik link addition processing time If no stations are being added Tlk 0 Tik Tlic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tils Sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs Tso master station scan time Tic 10 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 transmission speed x 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt Initial value 400 ms can be changed using SYS2 system register instruction Tis 7 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 transmission speed x 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When there are no stations that have not been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pcm 23 4 8 x4 71 Tpc Tt amp xPcm 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82 ms Tlit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms 10 22 FPS 10 5 PLC Link Response Time Calculation example 2 When there are no stations that have not been added to a 16 unit link
273. ttery is not con nected to the control unit Check the connection of the backup battery and then replace bat tery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can issued this self diag nostic error In that case the ERROR ALARM LED flashes Self diag nostic error set by F148 Stops ERR instruction Continues The self diagnostic error specified by the F148 ERR instruction is occurred Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose 13 43 Specifications FPS 13 8 Table of Instructions Table of Basic Instructions Sequence basic instructions Start ST XY R LT C Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open contact Start Not ST XY RALT C Begins a logic operation with a Form B normally closed contact Out OT YRL Outputs the operated result to the specified output AND AN Inverts the operated result up to this instruction 1 1 Connects a FormA normally open contact serially 1 2 AND Not AN T Connects a Form B normally closed contact serially OR RET Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel OR Not OR evn Connects a Form B normally closed contact in my parallel OR ALT AND stack ANS Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially OR stack ORS Connects the multiple instruction bloc
274. turns off Figure 76 FP Program 1 of target value match off instruction F167 af Example 2 XD If the elapsed value DT90204 and DT90205 for DF F167 HCIR K3 K40000 Y5 channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off Figure 77 FPE Program 2 of target value match off instruction F 167 High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 3 6 Sample Program Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FPX Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input X0 ail Operation start X5 O O Encoder A Motor Output terminal inverter Inverter operation gt gt Operation S top e Figure 78 FP High speed counter function sample program 1 wiring Operation chart 1 0 allocation VO We Speed Operation start signal Inverter operation signal Positioning operation running 5000 a Number of pulse Positioning operation start if Positioning done pulse vel rw R903A High speed counter CHO control flag Figure 79 FPE High speed counter function sample program 1 operation chart FPS 6 3 High speed Counter Function Program When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R903A R102 R100 ae a Hor Posiioning operations running R100 R100 R101
275. turns on While XB is in the on state a pulse of 300Hz is output from YO XB H F1 DMV H1110 DT300 Fl DMV K300 DT302 F172 PLSH DT300 KO Figure 98 FP Program of pulse output instruction F172 When the program is run the data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Data table Beare Control code 1 lee Frequency 2 Pulse output diagram XB J OG command oft 300 Hz AE 0 Pulse 0 Hz Figure 99 FP Pulse output diagram of F172 instruction High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 1 Control code lt H constant gt Hj jj jj 5435 LI L 0 Fixed Target value setting 0 Mode with no target value 1 Target value match stop mode Can be specified for only Ver 2 0 or later Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Output method 00 No counting CW 01 No counting CCW 10 Addition counting CW 12 Addition counting Directional output off 13 Addition counting Directional output on 21 Subtraction counting CCW 22 Subtraction counting Directional output off 23 Subtraction counting Directional output on 2 Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 KHz K1 to K9800 units Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approximately 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 KHz K48 to K100000 units Hz Max e
276. ulse is stopped Program MDie ete ge eg l ee re a eS re DF FO MV H 8 DT 90052 Pulse output control clear gE Fo mv ig arno a EPP Pe E T Figure 125 FP Sample program emergency stop program High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 5 PWM Output Function This section explains about the PWM output function of FP 6 5 1 Overview of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the F173 PWMH instruction the pulse width modulation output of specified duty ratio is obtained Setting the system register When using the PWM output function set the channels CHO and CH2 corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to Do not use high speed counter 6 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function PWM output instruction F173 While X6 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 502 5ms and duty ratio of 50 is output from Y 0 of specified channel CH2 X6 H FO MV K1 DT100 FO MV K500 DT101 F173 PWMH DT100 KO Figure 126 FPE PWM output instruction F173 program When the program is run the data table will be as shown below Data table DT100 Control code 1 K1 DT101 Duty 2 50 FPS 6 5 PWM Output Function 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 Frequency 2 Specification of duty specify using K constant If the control code is KO to K19 the
277. unication micro imagechecker FPS 9 3 Connection Example with External Devices Sample program In the following example the Micro lmagechecker is connected to the COM 1 port f Data transmission command The internal relay R 10 is turned on at the _ timing of the transmission condition RO 4 R10 F95 ASC M S wn DT101_ Fo IH Ten spaces inserted F159 MTRN DT100 K2 k H the contents consisting of two bytes of it are sent from COM 1 K1 port Data conversion The start command S character is con verted to ASCII code and written to DT101 to DUG otal ie J Data transmission The data in the transmission buffer is sent c Q m gi z m a H R9038 R11 H DF 1l Ril L fF10BkMV 201_ DT204 DTO The 4 word contents from DT201 to DT204 R11 F159 MTRN DT100 Ko Starting from DT100 the contents of 0 bytes are sent from the COM 1 K1 port The received data in the received buffer is read from the area in which itis stored from DT201 and sent to DTO Reception To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the reception done contact R9038 I on the empty data J Figure 185 FPE Sample program for micro imagechecker The various buffer statuses The following shows the statuses of the send and received buffers when the
278. unication Cassette Used with 1 N Communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1 N general purpose serial communication a This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPE Communication cassette two wire RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links C 1 channel RS485 type NET general purpose serial communication and a PLC link FPG COM3 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication FPS 9 5 3 Setting of System Register The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1 N general purpose serial communication Settings when using the COM 1 port No 412 Communication mode for COM 1 port Communication format for COM 1 port Character bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Baud rate setting 9600 bps Starting address for data received Set the desired address Buffer capacity setting for data received Set the desired capacity Max 2 048 byte Settings when using the COM 2 port Name Set value No No 414 Communication format Character bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting 9600 bps No 418 Starting address for data received Set the desired address No 419 Buffer capacity setting for data received Set the desired cap
279. unication cassette Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM port FPZ side 5 pin side 3 pin Ri Received Data RO R2 Received Data2 Ro To other device FP1 COM port Connection with FP1 COM port side 9 pin FP side 5 pin Ri Received Data RD R2 Received Data2_ RD To other device Figure 189 FPE Connection example with FP series PLC 2 9 24 FPS 9 3 Connection Example with External Devices Procedure of communication In this example an FP series PLC is connected to the COM 1 port and K100 is being stored to DTO of the PLC on the other end and K200 to DT1 7 HE asc ascresversse ovo J rm HD ory i FISOMTAN oTo e kt J Ladder program Data register RS232C port FP series PLC Data area read command is setin transmission buffer o Pe Data transmission with F159 MTRN i R9039 off and R9038 off od Reception buter writing point reset Data area reading command 01 R DD00000 00001 CR transmission o_O Transmission done flag R9039 on og a Data register value of PLC on other end is received Transmission 3 If normal 01 RD6400C 8006F p qe A Reception done flag R9038 on If error occurs 01 OOOO CR Data read BEG E Error code Empty data transmission with F159 MTRN Reception R 9039 off and R9038 off ee Reception buffer writing point rese
280. upt Ends the interrupt program return Interrupt Select interrupt enable disable or clear in S1 control Pome en and S2 and execute Special setti Communica Change the communication conditions for the tion condi COM portor tool port based on the contents spe tions setting cified by the character constant Password Change the password specified by the PLC setting based on the contents specified by the character constant Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the contents setting m H errtysi m specified by the character constant PLC link Set the system setting time when a PLC link is time setting used based on the contents specified by the character constant RS485 Change the communication conditions of the response COM port or tool port for RS 485 based on the time control contents specified by the character constant System Change the setting value of the system register registers for the PLC link function No 40 to IH Hsysz2 s 01 2 J No 47 changing 13 48 FP gt 13 8 Table of Instructions Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Data comparison instructions 16 bit data f Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bi comparison data in the comparative condition S1 52 Start Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bi data in the comparative condition Sk S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bi data in t
281. ure 128 FPE General purpose serial communication function Applicable communication cassette For 1 1 communication 1 channel RS232C type Part No FRG COM1 2 channel RS232C type Part No FPG COM2 For 1 N communication 1 channel RS485 type Part No FPG COM3 FPS 7 1 Communication Functions of FP PLC link Data is shared with PLCs connected through the MEWNET using dedicated internal relays Link relays L and data registers Link registers LD When using link relays if the link relay contact for one PLC goes on the same link relay also goes on in each of the other PLCs connected to the network With link registers if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC the change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network With a PLC link the status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC are fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and all of the units are booted at the same timing Link relay When the link relay LO of the master station No 1 is turned on that signal is converted by the ladder programs of the other stations and the Y0 of the other stations are output RO _ 7 No 2 Link register No 3 Link register No 4 Link register
282. urrent value Selected mode PLS and SIGN PLS and SIGN Forward off Reverse on Forward on Reverse off of high speed counter Elapsed value ey a Pulse output Pulse output when direction Pulse output when direction Addition current value from CW output is off output is on aat ea Pulse output Pulse output when direction Pulse output when direction Subirachou fromCCW output is on output is off ubtracti current value Home return Until the home position input X2 or X5 is entered by executing F171 SPDH instruction the pulse is continuously output To decelerate the movement when near the home set the bit corresponding to the special data register DT 90052 to off gt on off with the home position proximity input The differential counter clear output can be output when the return to the home position has been completed J OG operation Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 PLSH instruction is in the on state Also the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 PLSH instruction High speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions FPS 6 4 5 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function Positioning control instruction F171 trapezoidal control Automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table Generates a pulse from output YO at an initi
283. ved during the general purpose communicating This goes on when transmission has been completed when using general purpose communication It goes off when transmission is requested when using general purpose communication Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 SPCH are executed High speed counter control flag eed counter ag High speed counter control flag Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 SPCH are executed Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 SPCH are executed Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 SPCH are executed Not used Not used 13 24 FP 13 5 Table of Special Internal Relays Rely No Wane Deserifon SSCS mau otwed R9041 COM 1 port PLC link Turns on while PLC link function is used flag R9042 COM 2 portcommu This goes on when the general purpose communication function is used nication mode flag It goes off when MEWTOCOL is used ee oe e R9043 to R9046 R9047 COM 2 port commu nication error flag This goes on if a transmission e
284. voltage of input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select the bleeder resistor R so that the current will be greater than Bd The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R 13 44 kQ 56xl 2 4 Power supply voltage The wattage W of the resistor is W R In the actual selection use a value thatis 3 to 5 times the value of W FPS 5 3 Wiring of Input and Output 5 3 2 Output Wiring Protective circuit for inductive loads With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load Surge absorver Varistor IR Cl sierra a Output Load Output Load terminal 2g O terminal FPX N FPY COM COM Example of surge absorber R 50 Q C 0 47 uF When using a DC inductive load Diode Output Load terminal FPS COM Diode Reverse voltage Vp 3 times the load voltage Average rectified forward current l Load current or more Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below 5 Resistor Puoi Inductor utput utpu n terminal ii Eoad terminal mo Load mm FPZ
285. w e m m Number of bytes not yet trans mitted lt gt lt gt gt lt gt 3 gt lt 2 gt lt gt lt gt I gt Transmission point Figure 199 FP Flag operation when sending data STX and ETX setting Start code STX and end code ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted and the data is transmitted to an external device When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 go off Duplex transmission is disabled while the F159 MTRN instruction is being executed Check the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 FPS 9 7 Changing the Communication Mode of COM Port 9 7 Changing the Communication Mode of COM Port An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8000 in n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction Changing from general port to computer link Changing from computer link to general port RO R9032 RO R9032 Hor H 1 1 Hor Hil 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set to H8000 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed Specify the port to be changed Figure 200 FPE Changing the communication mode of COM port RS232C port selection flag in R9032 or R9042 Turns on when general communication mode is selected i Note When the power
286. ways off Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan Initial on type pulse relay This goes on for only the first scan after operation RUN has been started and goes off for the second and subsequent scans Initial off type pulse relay This goes off for only the first scan after operation RUN has been started and goes on for the second and subsequent scans Step ladder initial pulse relay on type Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process the mo ment the step ladder process is opened Not used Not used Repeats on off operations in 0 01 s cycles R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles Repeats on off operati in 0 1 s cycles R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay R901C 1 s clock pulse relay R901D 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operati in 0 2 s cycles Repeats on off operations in 1 s cycles Repeats on off operations in 2 s cycles 1 min clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 1 min cycles 13 22 FP 13 5 Table of Special Internal Relays Relay No Name R9020 RUN mode flag Description Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN roar frees Not used Not used Not used Not us

User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents